267
FORD RANGER Owner's Manual

Ford Ranger Manual

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

Ford Ranger Manual

Citation preview

Page 1: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 1/266

FORD RANGER Owner's Manual

Page 2: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 2/266

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest ofcontinuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any timewithout notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in aretrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.Errors and omissions excepted.

© Ford Motor Company 2013

All rights reserved.

Part Number: DB39120609AC (CG3575en) 12/2013 20131209205442

Page 3: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 3/266

IntroductionAbout This Manual...........................................7

Symbols Glossary.............................................7

Data Recording..................................................9Replacement Parts

Recommendation......................................10

Special Notices................................................10

Mobile CommunicationsEquipment.....................................................10

At a GlanceFront Exterior Overview.................................12

Rear Exterior Overview..................................13

Vehicle Interior Overview.............................14

Instrument Panel Overview.........................15

Child Safety Installing Child Seats.....................................18

Child Seat Positioning...................................21

Child Safety Locks..........................................23

Safety Belts

Principle of Operation..................................24Fastening the Safety Belts..........................24

Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................25

Safety Belt Minder.........................................26

Supplementary RestraintsSystem

Principle of Operation...................................27

Driver Airbag.....................................................27

Passenger Airbag...........................................28Side Airbags.....................................................29

Driver Knee Airbag.........................................29

Side Curtain Airbags.....................................29

Keys and Remote ControlsGeneral Information on Radio

Frequencies...................................................31

Remote Control................................................31

Replacing a Lost Key or RemoteControl............................................................33

Security Passive Anti-Theft System.........................34

Anti-Theft Alarm............................................34

LocksLocking and Unlocking.................................36

Steering WheelAdjusting the Steering Wheel...................39

Audio Control...................................................39

Voice Control...................................................40

Cruise Control.................................................40

Wipers and WashersWindshield Wipers..........................................41

Autowipers........................................................41

Windshield Washers.....................................42

Lighting

General Information......................................43

Lighting Control..............................................43

Autolamps........................................................44

Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................44

Headlamp Exit Delay....................................44

Daytime Running Lamps.............................45

Front Fog Lamps............................................45

Rear Fog Lamps.............................................46

Headlamp Leveling.......................................46

Direction Indicators........................................47Approach Lamps............................................47

Interior Lamps..................................................47

Windows and MirrorsPower Windows.............................................49

Interior Mirror...................................................50

Exterior Mirrors.................................................51

1

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Table of Contents

Page 4: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 4/266

Sliding Windows.............................................52

Instrument Cluster

Gauges...............................................................53Warning Lamps and Indicators.................53

Audible Warnings and Indicators.............57

Information DisplaysGeneral Information......................................59

Clock....................................................................61

Trip Computer..................................................61

Personalized Settings...................................63

Climate ControlPrinciple of Operation..................................65

Air Vents............................................................65

Manual Climate Control..............................65

Automatic Climate Control........................68

Heated Windows and Mirrors....................70

SeatsSitting in the Correct Position....................72

Manual Seats...................................................72

Power Seats.....................................................74

Head Restraints..............................................76

Rear Seats.........................................................76

Heated Seats...................................................78

Auxiliary Power PointsAuxiliary Power Points..................................79

Cigar Lighter.....................................................79

Storage CompartmentsCup Holders.....................................................80

Glove Box..........................................................80

Center Console...............................................80

Cool Box.............................................................81

Ashtray................................................................81

Glasses Holder.................................................81

Rear Seat Armrest..........................................81

Starting and Stopping the

EngineGeneral Information......................................82

Ignition Switch.................................................82

Steering Wheel Lock.....................................82

Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................83

Starting a Diesel Engine..............................84

Diesel Particulate Filter...............................84

Switching Off the Engine............................85

Fuel and RefuelingSafety Precautions........................................86

Fuel Quality......................................................87

Fuel Quality......................................................87

Running Out of Fuel......................................87

Catalytic Converter.......................................88

Refueling...........................................................88

Fuel Consumption.........................................90

Technical Specifications..............................91

TransmissionManual Transmission...................................93

Automatic Transmission.............................93

Four-Wheel DrivePrinciple of Operation...................................97

Using Four-Wheel Drive...............................97

Rear Axle

Limited Slip Differential.............................102Electronic Locking Differential................102

BrakesPrinciple of Operation.................................103

Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes...........................................................103

Parking Brake.................................................103

Hill Start Assist.............................................104

2

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Table of Contents

Page 5: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 5/266

Traction ControlPrinciple of Operation................................106

Using Traction Control...............................106

Stability ControlPrinciple of Operation.................................107

Using Stability Control................................107

Terrain ResponsePrinciple of Operation................................109

Using Hill Descent Control.......................109

Parking AidsPrinciple of Operation...................................111

Parking Aid........................................................111

Rear View Camera.........................................113

Cruise ControlPrinciple of Operation..................................116

Using Cruise Control.....................................116

Load CarryingGeneral Information.....................................118

Luggage Covers..............................................118

Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................120

Load Retaining Fixtures...............................121

Tailgate.............................................................124

TowingTowing a Trailer..............................................125

Trailer Sway Control....................................126

Recommended Towing Weights............126

Tow Ball............................................................129

Towing Points................................................130

Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels.......131

Driving HintsBreaking-In......................................................132

General Driving Points.................................132

Cold Weather Precautions........................132

Reduced Engine Performance.................132

Driving Through Water................................133

Floor Mats........................................................133

Roadside EmergenciesHazard Warning Flashers...........................135

First Aid Kit......................................................135

Warning Triangle...........................................135

Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................136

Fuses

Fuse Box Locations......................................138Fuse Specification Chart...........................140

Changing a Fuse...........................................149

MaintenanceGeneral Information....................................150

Opening and Closing the Hood...............150

Under Hood Overview - 2.5L Duratec-HE(122kW/165PS) - MI4.............................152

Under Hood Overview - 2.2L

Duratorq-TDCi (Puma) Diesel............154Under Hood Overview - 3.2L

Duratorq-TDCi (Puma) Diesel............156

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.5L Duratec-HE(122kW/165PS) - MI4.............................158

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi(Puma) Diesel/3.2L Duratorq-TDCi(Puma) Diesel...........................................158

Engine Oil Check...........................................158

Engine Coolant Check................................159

Power Steering Fluid Check.....................159Brake and Clutch Fluid Check.................160

Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap........160

Washer Fluid Check......................................161

Changing the 12V Battery...........................161

Checking the Wiper Blades.......................161

Changing the Wiper Blades.......................161

Changing a Bulb............................................162

Bulb Specification Chart...........................168

3

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Table of Contents

Page 6: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 6/266

Technical Specifications...........................169

Vehicle Care

Cleaning the Exterior....................................172Cleaning the Interior.....................................172

Repairing Minor Paint Damage................173

Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.........................173

Wheels and TiresGeneral Information....................................174

Using Winter Tires........................................174

Using Snow Chains......................................174

Changing a Road Wheel............................174Technical Specifications...........................180

Capacities and Specific-ations

Vehicle Dimensions.....................................182

Towbar Dimensions.....................................187

Vehicle Identification Plate......................190

Vehicle Identification Number................190

Navigation introductionGeneral Information.....................................191

Road Safety.....................................................191

Navigation Quick startNavigation Quick start................................193

Navigation unit overviewNavigation unit overview...........................194

Loading the navigation data....................196

System settingsSystem settings.............................................197

Navigation systemRoute options menu..................................200

Route displays...............................................201

Traffic Message ChannelPrinciple of Operation................................202

Using TMC......................................................202

Map updatesMap updates.................................................203

Audio introductionImportant audio information..................204

Audio unit overviewAudio unit overview ...................................205

Audio System Security Security code..................................................213

Audio Unit Clock and DateDisplays

Setting the clock on the audio unit........214

Audio unit operationOn/off control................................................216

Sound button.................................................216

Waveband button........................................216

Station tuning control.................................216

Station preset buttons................................217

Autostore control..........................................217

Traffic information control........................218

Audio unit menusAutomatic volume control........................219

Digital signal processing (DSP)..............219

News broadcasts..........................................219

Alternative frequencies..............................219

Regional mode (REG)...............................220

Compact Disc PlayerCompact disc playback..............................221

Track selection...............................................221

4

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Table of Contents

Page 7: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 7/266

Fast forward/reverse...................................221

Shuffle/random.............................................221

Repeat compact disc tracks.....................221

Compact disc track scanning..................222MP3 file playback.........................................222

MP3 display options...................................224

Ending compact disc playback..............225

Auxiliary input jackAuxiliary input jack......................................226

Audio system care

Antenna...........................................................227

Audio TroubleshootingAudio troubleshooting...............................228

TelephoneGeneral Information...................................229

Telephone setup..........................................229

Bluetooth setup...........................................230

Telephone controls......................................231

Using the telephone....................................231

Voice controlPrinciple of Operation................................234

Using voice control......................................234

Audio unit commands...............................235

Telephone commands..............................243

Climate control commands....................248

AppendicesType approvals.............................................250

Electromagnetic compatibility...............250

5

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Table of Contents

Page 8: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 8/266

6

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Page 9: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 9/266

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Thank you for choosing Ford. Werecommend that you take some time toget to know your vehicle by reading thismanual. The more that you know about it,the greater the safety and pleasure youwill get from driving it.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash andinjury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. We recommendagainst the use of any handheld devicewhile driving and encourage the use ofvoice-operated systems when possible.Make sure you are aware of all applicablelocal laws that may affect the use ofelectronic devices while driving.

Note: This manual describes productfeatures and options available throughoutthe range of available models, sometimeseven before they are generally available. It may describe options not fitted to your vehicle.

Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different models, so may appear different to you on your vehicle. However, the essential informationin the illustrations is always correct.

Note: Always use and operate your vehicle

in line with all applicable laws and  regulations.

Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral part of thevehicle.

This manual may qualify the location of acomponent as left-hand side or right-handside. The side is determined when facingforward in the seat.

Right-hand sideA

Left-hand sideB

Protecting the Environment

You must play your part in protecting theenvironment. Correct vehicle usage andthe authorized disposal of waste, cleaningand lubrication materials are significantsteps toward this aim.

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY

These are some of the symbols you maysee on your vehicle.

Safety alert

See Owner's Manual

Air conditioning system

Anti-lock braking system

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks

Battery

7

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Introduction

Page 10: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 10/266

Battery acid

Brake fluid - non petroleumbased

Brake system

Cabin air filter

Check fuel cap

Child safety door lock or unlock

Child seat lower anchor

Child seat tether anchor

Cruise control

Do not open when hot

Engine air filter

Engine coolant

Engine coolant temperature

Engine oil

Explosive gas

Fan warning

Fasten safety belt

Front airbag

Front fog lamps

Fuse compartment

Hazard warning flashers

Heated rear window

Heated windshield

Interior luggage compartmentrelease

Jack

Lighting control

Lock rear window

Low tire pressure warning

Maintain correct fluid level

8

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Introduction

Page 11: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 11/266

Panic alarm

Parking aid

Parking brake

Power steering fluid

Power windows front/rear

Service engine soon

Side airbag

Stability control

Windshield wash and wipe

Keep out of reach of children

Recyclable product

Do not dispose of in the trashbecause the material contains

lead

Use safety glasses whenhandling

DATA RECORDING

A large number of electronic componentsof your vehicle contain data storagemodules temporarily or permanentlystoring technical data about the conditionof the vehicle, events and errors.

In general, this technical informationdocuments the condition of parts,modules, systems or the environment:

• Operating conditions of systemcomponents (e.g. filling levels).

• Status messages of the vehicle and itsindividual components (e.g. number ofwheel revolutions/rotational speed,deceleration, lateral acceleration).

• Malfunction and defects in importantsystem components (e.g. lighting andbrake system).

• Vehicle reactions in particular drivingsituations (e.g. inflation of an airbag,activation of the stability regulationsystem).

• Environmental conditions (e.g.

temperature).These data are exclusively technical andhelp identification and correction of errorsas well as optimisation of vehiclefunctions. Motion profiles indicatingtravelled routes cannot be created withthese data.

If services are used (e.g. repair works,service processes, warranty cases, qualityassurance), employees of the service

network (including manufacturers) areable to read out this technical informationfrom the event and error data storagemodules using special diagnostic devices.If required, you will receive furtherinformation. After an error has beencorrected, these data are deleted from theerror storage module or they are constantlyoverwritten.

9

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Introduction

Page 12: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 12/266

Page 13: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 13/266

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash and

injury. We strongly recommend thatyou use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. We recommendagainst the use of any hand-held devicewhile driving and encourage the use ofvoice-operated systems when possible.Make sure you are aware of all applicablelocal laws that may affect the use ofelectronic devices while driving.

11

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Introduction

Page 14: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 14/266

FRONT EXTERIOR OVERVIEW

See Locking and Unlocking (page 36).A

See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 161).BSee Maintenance (page 150).C

See Changing a Bulb (page 162).D

Tire pressure.  See Technical Specifications (page 180).E

See Changing a Road Wheel (page 174).F

12

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

At a Glance

Page 15: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 15/266

REAR EXTERIOR OVERVIEW

Fuel filler flap.  See Refueling (page 88).A

See Changing a Bulb (page 162).BAuxiliary battery.  See Changing the 12V Battery  (page 161).C

See Changing a Bulb (page 162).D

Tire pressure.  See Technical Specifications (page 180).E

See Changing a Road Wheel (page 174).F

13

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

At a Glance

Page 16: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 16/266

VEHICLE INTERIOR OVERVIEW

See Transmission (page 93).A

See Locks (page 36).BSee Power Windows (page 49).  See Exterior Mirrors (page 51).C

See Head Restraints (page 76).D

See Fastening the Safety Belts (page 24).E

See Rear Seats (page 76).F

See Parking Brake (page 103).G

14

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

At a Glance

Page 17: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 17/266

See Manual Seats (page 72).  See Power Seats (page 74).H

See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 150).I

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

Right-Hand Drive

15

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

At a Glance

Page 18: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 18/266

Left-Hand Drive

Door lock button.  See Lockingand Unlocking (page 36).

A

Audio unit.  See Audio unitoverview (page 205).

B

Multi-functional display.C

Multi-function lever: Directionindicators.  See Direction

Indicators (page 47). MainBeam.  See Lighting Control(page 43).  or Wiper lever.  SeeWipers and Washers (page41).

D

Audio control.  See AudioControl (page 39).

E

16

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

At a Glance

Page 19: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 19/266

Instrument cluster.  See Gauges(page 53). SeeWarning Lampsand Indicators (page 53).

F

Multi-function lever: Directionindicators.  See DirectionIndicators (page 47). MainBeam.  See Lighting Control(page 43).  or Wiper lever.  SeeWipers and Washers (page41).

G

Exterior mirror control. SeeExterior Mirrors (page 51).

H

Headlamp levelling switch.  See

Headlamp Leveling (page 46).

I

Air vents. See Air Vents (page65).

J

Bonnet release lever. SeeOpening and Closing theHood (page 150).

K

Driver side storagecompartment. See Glove Box(page 80).

L

Cruise control.  See CruiseControl (page 116).

M

Ignition switch.  See IgnitionSwitch (page 82).

N

Horn.O

Driver knee airbag. See Principleof Operation (page 27).

P

Stability control (ESP) switch.See Using Stability Control(page 107).

Q

Passenger airbag deactivationwarning lamp.  See PassengerAirbag (page 28).

R

Auxiliary power sockets.  SeeAuxiliary Power Points (page79).

S

Climate controls. See ManualClimate Control (page 65).

T

Auxiliary input and USB SeeAuxiliary input jack (page 226).or Auxiliary switches.

U

Hazard warning flasher switch.See Hazard Warning Flashers(page 135).

V

Electronic Locking Differential(ELD) button.  See ElectronicLocking Differential (page 102).

W

Hill descent control.  See TerrainResponse (page 109).

X

17

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

At a Glance

Page 20: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 20/266

INSTALLING CHILD SEATS

WARNINGS

Use an approved child seat to securechildren less than 59 inches (150centimeters) tall in the rear seat.

Extreme Hazard! Do not use arearward facing child seat on a seatprotected by an air bag in front of it!

Read and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions when you are installing

a child seat.

Do not modify child seats in any way.

Do not hold a child on your lap whenyour vehicle is moving.

Do not leave unattended children inyour vehicle.

WARNINGS

If your vehicle has been involved in acrash, have the child seats checked

by an authorized dealer.

Note: Mandatory use of child seats variesfrom country to country.

Only child seats certified to ECE-R44.03(or later) have been tested and approvedfor use in your vehicle. A choice of theseare available from an authorized dealer.

Child Seats for Different MassGroups

Use the correct child seat as follows:

Baby Safety Seat

Secure children that weigh less than 29pounds (13 kilograms) in a rearward facingbaby safety seat (Group 0+) on the rearseat.

18

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Child Safety 

Page 21: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 21/266

Child Safety Seat

Secure children that weigh between 29and 40 pounds (13 and 18 kilograms) in achild safety seat (Group 1) on the rear seat.

Booster Seats

WARNINGS

Do not install a booster seat or abooster cushion with only the lap

strap of the safety belt.

Do not install a booster seat or abooster cushion with a safety beltthat is slack or twisted.

Do not put the safety belt under yourchild’s arm or behind their back.

Do not use pillows, books or towelsto boost your child’s height.

Make sure that your children sit in an

upright position.

Note: When using a child seat on a rear  seat, make sure that the child seat reststightly against the vehicle seat. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head  restraint.  See Head Restraints (page 76).

Booster Seat (Group 2)

Secure children that weigh more than 33pounds (15 kilograms) but are less than 59inches (150 centimeters) tall in a boosterseat or a booster cushion.

We recommend that you use a boosterseat that combines a cushion with abackrest instead of a booster cushion only.The raised seating position will allow you

to position the shoulder strap of the adultsafety belt over the center of your child’sshoulder and the lap strap tightly acrosstheir hips.

Booster Cushion (Group 3)

19

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Child Safety 

Page 22: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 22/266

ISOFIX Anchor Points

WARNING

Use an anti-rotation device whenusing the ISOFIX system. Werecommend the use of a top tether

or support leg.

Note: When you are purchasing an ISOFIX  seat, make sure that you know the correct mass group and ISOFIX size class for theintended seating locations.  See Child Seat

 Positioning (page 21).

Your vehicle has ISOFIX anchor points that

accommodate universally approvedISOFIX child seats.

The ISOFIX system comprises two rigidattachment arms on the child seat thatattach to anchor points on the outboardrear seats, where the cushion and backrestmeet. Tether anchor points are located inthe back panel trim for child seats with atop tether.

Top Tether Anchor Points

Attaching a Child Seat with TopTethers

WARNINGS

Do not attach a tether strap toanything other than the correcttether anchor point.

Make sure that the top tether strapis not slack or twisted and is properlylocated on the anchor point.

make sure

Note: You may need to raise or remove the head restraint to ease installation.  See Head Restraints (page 76).

1. Place the child seat on the back seatcushion and fold the relevant seatbackforward.  See Rear Seats (page 76).

2. Route the tether strap under the headrestraint to the anchor point.

3. Push the seatback to the uprightposition.

4. Push the child seat back firmly toengage the ISOFIX lower anchor points.

5. Tighten the tether strap in line with thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.

20

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Child Safety 

Page 23: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 23/266

CHILD SEAT POSITIONING

WARNINGS

See an authorized dealer for thelatest details relating to ourrecommended child seats.

Extreme Hazard! Do not use arearward facing child seat on a seatprotected by an air bag in front of it!

WARNINGS

When using a child seat with asupport leg, the support leg must

rest securely on the floor.When using a child seat with a safetybelt, make sure that the safety beltis not slack or twisted.

The child seat must rest tightlyagainst the vehicle seat. It may benecessary to lift or remove the head

restraint.  See Head Restraints (page 76).

Mass group categories

Seating positions 3210+0

46 - 79 lbs(22 - 36 kg)

 33 - 55 lbs(15 - 25 kg)

20 - 40 lbs(9 - 18 kg)

Up to 29lbs (13 kg)

Up to 22lbs (10 kg)

UF¹UF¹UF¹XXFront passenger seatwith airbag ON

U¹U¹U¹U¹U¹Front passenger seatwith airbag OFF

UUUUURear seats

XXXXXSingle cab center seat

X Not suitable for children in this mass group.

U Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group.

U¹ Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group. However,we recommend that you secure children in a government approved child seat, on the rearseat.

UF¹ Suitable for universal category forward facing child seats approved for use in thismass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved

child seat, on the rear seat.Note: When using a child seat on a front seat, always adjust the front passenger's seat to its fully rearward position. If it provesdifficult to tighten the lap section of the safety belt without slack remaining, adjustthe seatback to the fully upright position and raise the height of the seat.  See Seats(page 72).

21

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Child Safety 

Page 24: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 24/266

ISOFIX Child Seats

Mass group categories

Seating positions10+

Forward facingRear facing

20 - 40 lbs (9 - 18 kg)Up to 29 lbs (13 kg)

Not ISOFIX equippedSize classFront seat

Seat type

A, B, B1, C, D1

C, D, E1Size classRear outboard seat ISOFIX

IL, IUF3IL2Seat type

Not ISOFIX equippedSize classRear center seat

Seat type

IL Suitable for particular ISOFIX child seat systems of the semi-universal category. Pleaseconsult child seat systems suppliers' vehicle recommendation lists.

IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward facing child seat systems of universal category approvedfor use in this mass group and ISOFIX size class.1The ISOFIX size class for both universal and semi-universal child seat systems is defined

by the capital letters A to G. These identification letters are displayed on ISOFIX childseat.2At time of publishing the recommended Group O+ ISOFIX baby safety seat is the Britax

Romer Baby Safe. See an authorized dealer for the latest details relating to ourrecommended child seats.3At time of publishing the recommended Group 1 ISOFIX child seat is the Britax Romer

Duo. See an authorized dealer for the latest details relating to our recommended childseats.

22

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Child Safety 

Page 25: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 25/266

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

WARNING

You cannot open the doors frominside if you have put the child safetylocks on.

Left-hand side

Turn counterclockwise to lock andclockwise to unlock.

Right-hand side

Turn clockwise to lock andcounterclockwise to unlock.

23

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Child Safety 

Page 26: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 26/266

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS

Wear a seat belt and keep sufficientdistance between yourself and thesteering wheel. Only when you use

the seat belt properly, can it hold you in aposition to achieve its optimum effect.

Never use a seat belt for more thanone person.

Use the correct buckle for each seatbelt.

Do not use a seat belt that is slackor twisted.

Do not wear thick clothing. The seatbelt must fit tightly around your bodyto achieve its optimum effect.

Position the shoulder strap of theseat belt over the center of yourshoulder and position the lap strap

tightly across your hips.

The driver and front passenger seat beltretractors are fitted with a seat beltpretensioner. Seat belt pretensioners havea lower deployment threshold than the airbags. During minor collisions, it is possiblethat only the seat belt pretensioners willdeploy.

Status After a Collision

WARNING

If your vehicle has been involved inan accident, have the seat belts andanchorages checked by properly

trained technicians.

FASTENING THE SAFETYBELTS

WARNINGSInsert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear a distinct click. You havenot fastened the safety belt correctly

if you do not hear a click.

Make sure that your safety belt issecurely stored away and is notoutside your vehicle when closing the

door.

24

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Safety Belts

Page 27: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 27/266

Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if youpull it sharply or if your vehicle is on a slope.

The rear outer safety belts can lock if youreturn the seatback from a folded positionto the upright position forcefully. Shouldthe safety belt lock, recline the seat usingthe recline adjustment.  See Rear Seats(page 76).

Press the red button on the buckle torelease the belt. Hold the tongue and let itretract completely and smoothly to itsstowed position.

Using Safety Belts DuringPregnancy 

WARNING

Position the safety belt correctly foryour safety and that of your unborn

child. Do not use only the lap strapor the shoulder strap.

Pregnant women should always wear theirsafety belt. The lap belt portion of acombination lap and shoulder belt shouldbe positioned low across the hips belowthe belly and worn as tight as comfort willallow. The shoulder belt should bepositioned to cross the middle of theshoulder and the center of the chest.

SAFETY BELT HEIGHTADJUSTMENT

WARNING

Position the safety belt heightadjuster so that the safety belt restsacross the middle of your shoulder.

Failure to adjust the safety belt correctlycould reduce its effectiveness and increasethe risk of injury in a crash.

25

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Safety Belts

Page 28: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 28/266

To adjust the shoulder belt height, pull thebutton and slide the height adjuster up ordown.

SAFETY BELT MINDER

WARNING

The system will only provideprotection when you use the safetybelt correctly.

Type 1: The warning lamp illuminates for6 seconds when you switch the ignition on

to remind the driver to fasten the safetybelt.

Type 2: The warning lamp continues toilluminate when the driver’s safety belt isnot fastened.

Type 3: The warning lamp illuminates anda tone sounds when the followingconditions have been met:

• The front safety belts have not beenfastened.

• Your vehicle exceeds a relatively lowspeed.

It will also illuminate when a front safetybelt is unfastened in an occupied seat andyour vehicle is moving.

If you do not fasten your safety belt, theaudible warning will turn off automaticallyafter approximately five minutes. Thewarning lamp continues to illuminate untilyou fasten the safety belt.

Switching the Safety Belt MinderOff

See an authorized dealer.

26

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Safety Belts

Page 29: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 29/266

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS

Extreme Hazard! Never use arearward facing child restraint on aseat protected by an active airbag in

front of it. Death or serious injury to thechild can occur.

Do not modify the front of yourvehicle in any way. This couldadversely affect deployment of the

airbags. Failure to adhere to this warningcould result in serious personal injury ordeath.

Wear a safety belt and keepsufficient distance between yourselfand the steering wheel. Only when

you use the safety belt correctly, can it holdyou in a position that allows the airbag toachieve its optimum effect.  See Sittingin the Correct Position (page 72). Failureto adhere to this warning could result inserious personal injury or death.

Repairs to the steering wheel,

steering column, seats, airbags andsafety belts must be carried out byan authorized dealer. Failure to adhere tothis warning could result in seriouspersonal injury or death.

Keep the areas in front of the airbagsfree from obstruction. Do not affixanything to or over the airbag covers.

In the event of a crash, hard objects couldcause serious personal injury or death.

Do not puncture the seat with sharpobjects. This could damage andadversely affect deployment of the

airbags. Failure to adhere to this warningcould result in serious personal injury ordeath.

Use seat covers designed for seatswith side airbags. Have these fittedby an authorized dealer. Failure to

adhere to this warning could result inserious personal injury or death.

Note: You will hear a loud bang and see acloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.

Note: Only wipe airbag covers with a dampcloth.

DRIVER AIRBAG

The airbag will deploy during significantfrontal collisions or collisions that are upto 30 degrees from the left or the right. The

airbag will inflate within a few thousandthsof a second and deflate on contact withthe occupant, thus cushioning forwardbody movement. During minor frontalcollisions, overturns, rear collisions andside collisions, the airbag will not deploy.

27

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Supplementary Restraints System

Page 30: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 30/266

PASSENGER AIRBAG

The airbag will deploy during significantfrontal crashes or crashes that are up to30 degrees from the left or the right. Theairbag will inflate within a few thousandthsof a second and deflate on contact withthe occupant, thus cushioning forwardbody movement. During minor frontalcrashes, overturns, rear crashes and sidecrashes, the airbag will not deploy.

Fitting the Passenger AirbagDeactivation Switch

WARNING

If you need to fit a child restraint ona seat protected by an operationalairbag in front of it, have a passenger

airbag deactivation switch fitted. Have thisfitted by an authorized dealer.

If the airbag warning lamp illuminates or

flashes when you are driving, this indicatesa malfunction. Remove the child restraintand have the system checked immediately.

Switching the Passenger AirbagOff

WARNING

You must switch the airbag off whenusing a rearward facing child seat onthe front seat.

Switch offA

Switch onB

Turn the switch to position A.

When you switch the ignition on,check that the airbag

deactivation warning lampilluminates.

Note: The key switch is located in the glovecompartment with the airbag deactivationwarning lamp in the instrument panel.

28

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Supplementary Restraints System

Page 31: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 31/266

Switching the Passenger AirbagOn

WARNING

You must switch the airbag on whenyou are not using a child seat on thefront seat.

Turn the switch to position B.

When you switch the ignition on,check that the airbag activationwarning lamp illuminates.

Note: The key switch is located in the glove

compartment with the airbag deactivationwarning lamp in the instrument panel.

SIDE AIRBAGS

WARNING

Use seat covers designed for seatswith side airbags. Have these fittedby an authorized dealer.

The airbags are located inside theseatback of the front seats. There is a labelattached to the side of the seatback toindicate this.

The airbag will deploy during significantlateral collisions. The airbag will not deployin minor lateral and frontal collisions, rearcollisions, or overturns.

DRIVER KNEE AIRBAG

WARNING

Do not attempt to open the airbagcover.

The airbag will deploy during frontalcollisions or collisions that are up to 30degrees from the left or the right. Theairbag will inflate within a few thousandthsof a second and deflate on contact withthe occupants, thus providing a cushionbetween the driver’s knees and the steeringcolumn. During overturns, rear collisionsand side collisions, the knee airbag will notdeploy.

For item location: See Instrument PanelOverview (page 15).

Note: The airbag has a lower deploymentthreshold than the front airbags. During a minor collision, it is possible that only the knee airbag will deploy.

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS

The airbags are located over the front andrear side windows.

29

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Supplementary Restraints System

Page 32: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 32/266

Page 33: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 33/266

GENERAL INFORMATION ONRADIO FREQUENCIES

Note: Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party responsiblefor compliance could void the user ’  s authority to operate the equipment.

The typical operating range for yourtransmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).

A decrease in operating range could becaused by:

• weather conditions

• nearby radio towers

• structures around your vehicle

• other vehicles parked next to yourvehicle.

The radio frequency used by your remotecontrol can also be used by other shortdistance radio transmissions (e.g. amateurradios, medical equipment, wirelessheadphones, remote controls and alarmsystems). If the frequencies are jammed,you will not be able to use your remote

control. You can lock and unlock the doorswith the key.

Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked  before leaving it unattended.

Note: If you are in range, the remote controlwill operate if you press any buttonunintentionally.

REMOTE CONTROL

You can program a maximum of eightremote controls to your vehicle. Thisincludes any that were supplied with yourvehicle. The remote controls must remaininside your vehicle during the programmingprocedure. Fasten the front safety beltsand close all doors to make sure thatconflicting chimes do not sound duringprogramming.

Programming a New RemoteControl

1. Turn the ignition key from position 0 to

position II four times within six seconds.2. Turn the ignition to position 0. A tone

sounds to indicate that it is nowpossible to program a remote control.

3. Press any button on a new remotecontrol within 10 seconds. A tone willsound as confirmation.

4. Repeat step three within 10 secondsfor each new remote control. Do notremove the key from the ignition when

pressing the button on the remotecontrol.

5. Switch the ignition back on (positionII) or wait for 10 seconds withoutprogramming another remote controlto end the key programming. Only theremote controls which you have justprogrammed are now able to lock andunlock your vehicle.

Reprogramming the Unlocking

FunctionNote: When you press the unlock buttoneither all the doors are unlocked or only thedriver ’  s door and the liftgate are unlocked.Pressing the unlock button again unlocks all the doors.

Press and hold the unlock and lock buttonson the remote control simultaneously forat least four seconds with the ignition off.The direction indicators will flash twice to

confirm the change.To return to the original unlocking function,repeat the process.

Programming the additional key 

Note: You will need to have two programmed keys for this procedure.

1. Insert the first key and turn the ignitionon.

31

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Keys and Remote Controls

Page 34: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 34/266

2. Remove the key within 10 seconds.

3. Insert the second key within 10 secondsand turn the ignition on.

4. Remove the key within 10 seconds.5. Insert the additional key within 10

seconds which need to beprogrammed.

Changing the Remote ControlBattery 

Make sure that you dispose ofold batteries in anenvironmentally friendly way.

Seek advice from your local authorityregarding recycling.

Remote Control With a Folding Key Blade

1. Insert a screwdriver as far as possibleinto the slot on the side of the remotecontrol, gently push the clip.

2. Press the clip down to release the

battery cover.

3. Carefully remove the cover.

4. Turn the remote control over to removethe battery.

Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or the printed circuit board with the screwdriver.

5. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) withthe + facing upwards.

6. Replace the battery cover.

32

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Keys and Remote Controls

Page 35: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 35/266

REPLACING A LOST KEY ORREMOTE CONTROL

Replacement keys or remote controls canbe purchased from an authorized dealer.Authorized dealers can program remotecontrols for your vehicle.  See PassiveAnti-Theft System (page 34).

To re-program the passive anti-theftsystem see an authorized dealer.

33

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Keys and Remote Controls

Page 36: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 36/266

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFTSYSTEM

Principle of OperationThe system prevents someone fromstarting the engine with an incorrectlycoded key.

Coded Keys

If you lose a key, you can obtain areplacement from an authorized dealer. Ifpossible, provide them with the keynumber from the tag provided with the

original keys. You can also obtain extrakeys from an authorized dealer.

Note: Have all of your remaining keyserased and recoded if you lose a key. Have replacement keys coded together with recoding your remaining keys. See an authorized dealer for further information.

Note: Do not shield your keys with metalobjects. This may prevent the receiver from recognizing a coded key.

Arming the Engine Immobilizer

When you switch the ignition off the engineimmobilizer will arm automatically after ashort time.

Disarming the Engine Immobilizer

When you switch the ignition on the engineimmobilizer will disarm automatically if acorrectly coded key is used.

If you are unable to start the engine with acorrectly coded key, have your vehiclechecked by an authorized dealer.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM

Alarm System

Your vehicle may have one of the followingalarm systems:

• Perimeter alarm with interior sensors.

• Perimeter alarm with interior sensorsand battery back-up sounder.

Perimeter Alarm

The perimeter alarm is a deterrent againstunauthorized access to your vehiclethrough the doors and the hood.

Interior Sensors

WARNINGS

Do not cover up the interior lamp unitsensors.

Do not arm the alarm with full guardif passengers, animals or othermoving objects are inside your

vehicle.

Do not leave the rear seat cushionfolded up in the double cab when theinterior sensors are armed.

Do not leave the glasses holder open.

The sensors act as a deterrent againstunauthorized intrusion by sensing anymovement within your vehicle.

Arming the alarm will activate the interiorsensors.

Note: To permanently deactivate theinterior motion sensor, see an authorized dealer.

34

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Security 

Page 37: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 37/266

Note: Fuel fired heater may trigger false alarms. If you are using the fuel fired heater,direct the air flow towards the foot well.

Battery Back-up Sounder

The battery back-up sounder is anadditional alarm system that will sound asiren when the alarm is triggered. Whenyou lock your vehicle the system is armed.The sounder has its own battery and willsound an alarm siren even if someonedisconnects your vehicle battery or thebattery back-up sounder itself.

Triggering the Alarm

Once armed, the alarm is triggered in anyof the following ways:

• If someone opens a door or the hoodwithout a valid key or remote control.

• If someone removes the multi-functiondisplay.

• If you switch the ignition on without avalid key.

• If the interior sensors detect movement

within your vehicle.• On vehicles with a battery back-up

sounder, if someone disconnects yourvehicle battery or the battery back-upsounder itself.

If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn willsound for 30 seconds and the hazardwarning flasher will flash for five minutes.

Any further attempts to perform one of theabove will trigger the alarm again.

Full and Reduced Guard

Full Guard

Full guard is the standard setting.

In full guard, the interior sensors are onwhen you arm the alarm.

Note: This may result in false alarms if  animals or moving objects are inside your vehicle.

Reduced Guard

Note: To switch this feature on or off, see an authorized dealer.

In reduced guard, the interior sensors areoff when you arm the alarm.

Note: Reduced guard is available only onvehicles with remote central locking.

Note: You can set the alarm to reduced  guard for the current ignition cycle only. The

 alarm will reset to full guard the next time you unlock and then relock the vehicle withthe remote control.

Selecting Full or Reduced Guard

To activate reduced guard, lock the doorswith the key.

To deactivate reduced guard, unlock thedoors with the key or remote control.

To activate full guard, lock the doors with

the remote control.Note: You can set the alarm to reduced  guard for the current ignition cycle only. The alarm will reset to full guard the next time you unlock and then relock the vehicle withthe remote control.

Arming the Alarm

To arm the alarm, lock your vehicle.  SeeLocks (page 36).

Disarming the Alarm

Disarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors with the key and switching theignition on with a correctly coded keywithin 12 seconds or unlocking the doorswith the remote control.

35

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Security 

Page 38: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 38/266

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

Note: Do not leave your keys in the vehicle.

Note: All the doors will lock automatically when the vehicle is driven at or above 7 Km/h (4.3 mph). This function can beenabled or disabled, see driver configuration mode later in this procedure.

Locking and unlocking the doorswith the key 

UnlockA

LockB

Note: To double lock  the doors, turn the key to the lock position twice within three seconds.

Locking and unlocking the doorswith the remote control

Automatic relocking: The doors will

relock automatically if you do not open adoor within 45 seconds of unlocking thedoors with the remote control. The doorlocks and the alarm will return to theirprevious state.

Key fold/unfold buttonA

UnlockB

LockC

Press the button B once to unlock thevehicle.

Press the button C once to activate centrallocking.

Note:Central locking is activated only when

 all the passenger doors are closed.

Press the button C twice within fourseconds to double lock the doors.

Note: Double locking is activated only when all the passenger doors are closed and the hood is closed in the vehicle fitted with alarm.

36

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Locks

Page 39: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 39/266

WARNING

Do not activate double locking whenpersons or animals are inside the

vehicle. You will not be able tounlock the doors from inside if you havedouble locked them.

Note: If the ignition is switched on with thedouble locking function activated, the lockwill automatically return to single lock stage.

Double locking is a theft protection featurethat prevents someone from opening thedoors from the inside.

Note: The driver ’  s door can be unlocked 

with the key. This needs to be used if the remote control is not functioning.

Note: If the vehicle remains locked for  several weeks, the remote control will bedisabled. The vehicle must be unlocked and the engine started using the key. Unlocking and starting the vehicle once will enable the remote control.

Reprogramming the unlocking function

The unlocking function may bereprogrammed so that only the driver’sdoor is unlocked.  See Remote Control(page 31).

Locking and unlocking confirmation

Note: When you lock the doors, thedirection indicators will flash once.

When you double lock the doors, thedirection indicators will flash twice.

When you unlock the doors the directionindicators will flash one long flash.

Child play protection function

If the remote control buttons are pressedcontinuously several times, the locking andunlocking function will be blocked for awhile to avoid door latches fromoverheating.

Locking and unlocking the doorsfrom inside

Press the button. For item

location. See Instrument PanelOverview (page 15).

UnlockA

OpenB

Driver configuration mode

Note: This operation has to be done within 30 seconds .

1. Switch the ignition ON.

2. Press door lock button three times.

3. Switch the ignition OFF.

4. Press door lock button three times.

5. Switch the ignition ON.

The system will chirp to indicate that thedriver configuration mode is enabled.

Once in driver configuration mode, followthe steps mentioned below to toggle thestatus of the automatic locking by speedor automatic unlocking.

37

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Locks

Page 40: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 40/266

Automatic locking by speed

Press the central lock or unlock buttontwice within three seconds and wait for

three seconds to toggle the automaticlocking by speed function. The system willchirp when toggling.

Automatic unlocking

Note: Automatic unlock is default enabled.

Press the central lock or unlock buttonthree time within three seconds and waitfor three seconds to toggle the automaticunlocking function.

If the automatic unlocking function isenabled:

• All doors will be unlocked whileopening the driver door or frontpassenger door (vehicles not deliveredwith remote control) from inside, withthe key in ignition.

If the automatic unlocking function isdisabled:

• Only the respective door will be

unlocked while opening from inside.

Note: Opening the rear doors will never unlock the other doors, when opened frominside.

Locking the doors individually withthe key 

Note: If the central locking function fails tooperate, the doors can be individually locked using the key in the position shown.

Left-hand side

Turn clockwise to lock.

Right-hand side

Turn counterclockwise to lock.

Unlocking

Note: If the child safety locks have also been activated, pulling the internal lever willonly deactivate the emergency locking and  not the child safety lock. The doors can only  be opened using the external door handle.

Note: If the doors have been unlocked, they  have to be locked individually using this method until the central locking function has been repaired.

Unlock the driver's door using the key. Theother doors can be unlocked individually by  pulling the interior door handles on thosedoors.

38

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Locks

Page 41: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 41/266

ADJUSTING THE STEERINGWHEEL

WARNINGDo not adjust the steering wheelwhen your vehicle is moving.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in thecorrect position.  See Sitting in the Correct

 Position (page 72).

1. Unlock the steering column.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desiredposition.

3. Lock the steering column.

AUDIO CONTROL

Select the required source on the audiounit.

You can operate the following functions

with the control:

Type 1

Volume upA

Seek up, next or end callB

39

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Steering Wheel

Page 42: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 42/266

Volume downC

Seek down, previous or acceptcall

D

Type 2

Volume upA

Seek up or nextB

Volume downC

Seek down or previousD

ModeE

Press M to select the audio source.

Seek, Next or Previous

Press the seek button to:

• tune the radio to the next or previousstored preset.

• play the next or the previous track.

Press and hold the seek button to:

• tune the radio to the next station up ordown the frequency band.

• seek through a track.

VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

Push the control to switch on or off thevoice control.

CRUISE CONTROL

See Cruise Control (page 116).

40

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Steering Wheel

Page 43: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 43/266

WINDSHIELD WIPERS

CAUTION

Operating this function with theengine off will drain the battery.

Single wipeA

Intermittent wipe or autowipersB

Normal wipeC

High speed wipeD

Intermittent wipe

Long wipe intervalA

Intermittent wipeB

Short wipe intervalC

AUTOWIPERS

CAUTIONS

Do not switch autowipers on in dryweather conditions. The rain sensoris very sensitive and the wipers may

operate if dirt, mist or insects hit thewindshield.

Replace the wiper blades as soon asthey begin to leave bands of waterand smears. If you do not replace

them, the rain sensor will continue todetect water on the windshield and thewipers will operate, even though the

majority of the windshield is dry.

Fully defrost the windshield in icyconditions before you switchautowipers on.

Switch autowipers off before youenter a car wash.

High sensitivityAOnB

Low sensitivityC

If you switch autowipers on, the wipers willnot cycle until water is detected on thewindshield. The rain sensor will thencontinuously measure the amount of wateron the windshield and adjust the speed ofthe wipers automatically.

41

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Wipers and Washers

Page 44: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 44/266

Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensorusing the rotary control. With lowsensitivity, the wipers will operate whenthe sensor detects a lot of water on the

windshield. With high sensitivity, the wiperswill operate if the sensor detects a smallamount of water on the windshield.

WINDSHIELD WASHERS

CAUTION

Operating this function with theengine off will drain the battery.

WARNING

Do not operate the windshieldwashers for more than 10 secondsor when the reservoir is empty.

42

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Wipers and Washers

Page 45: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 45/266

GENERAL INFORMATION

Condensation in Lamp Assemblies

Exterior lamps have vents toaccommodate normal changes in airpressure.

Condensation can be a natural by-productof this design. When moist air enters thelamp assembly through the vents, there isa possibility that condensation can occurwhen the temperature is cold. Whennormal condensation occurs, a fine mistcan form on the interior of the lens. Thefine mist eventually clears and exitsthrough the vents during normal operation.

Clearing time may take as long as 48 hoursunder dry weather conditions.

Examples of acceptable condensation are:

• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,drip marks or large droplets).

• A fine mist covers less than 50% of thelens.

Examples of unacceptable condensation

are:• A water puddle inside the lamp.

• Streaks, drip marks or large dropletspresent on the interior of the lens.

If you see any unacceptable condensation,have your vehicle checked by an authorizeddealer.

LIGHTING CONTROL

OffA

Auto-light controlB

HeadlampsC

Parking lamps, instrument panellamps, license plate lamps andtail lamps

D

Parking Lamps

WARNING

Prolonged use of the parking lampswhen the ignition is off will cause thebattery to run out of charge.

Select position D on the lighting control toswitch the parking lamps on. The parkinglamps operate with the ignition on or off.

Move the lever up or down to switch the

right or left hand side parking lamp.Note: Switch on the parking lamp within 10 minutes from the key out, reinsert the key if exceeded.

43

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Lighting

Page 46: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 46/266

High Beams

Pull the lever toward you to switchbetween high beam and low beam.

Headlamp Flasher

Pull the lever toward you slightly andrelease it to flash the headlamps.

AUTOLAMPS

WARNING

In severe weather conditions, it maybe necessary to switch yourheadlamps on manually.

Note: If you have switched autolamps on, you can only switch the high beam on when autolamps has switched the headlamps on.

The headlamps will come on and go offautomatically depending on the ambientlight.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTINGDIMMER

Press it repeatedly or press it and hold ituntil the desired level is reached.

Note: If you disconnect the battery or itloses charge the instrument lighting will

 return to its brightest setting.

HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY

Switch the ignition off and pull thedirection indicator lever toward you toswitch the headlamps on. A short tone willsound. They will automatically turn offafter three minutes or 30 seconds after thelast door is closed.

Opening any door within 30 seconds afterclosing all the doors will result in threeminute timer starting again.

Switch the ignition on or pull the directionindicator lever towards you again to switchthe headlamp exit delay off.

44

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Lighting

Page 47: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 47/266

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF

EQUIPPED)

WARNING

Always remember to switch yourheadlamps on in low light situationsor during inclement weather. The

system does not activate the tail lampsand may not provide adequate lightingduring these conditions. Failure to activateyour headlamps under these conditionsmay result in a collision.

To switch the system on:1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Switch the lighting control to the off orautolamp position.

FRONT FOG LAMPS

Control lever

WARNING

Only use the front fog lamps whenvisibility is considerably restricted byfog, snow or rain.

Note: You cannot switch the front foglamps on unless you have switched the headlamps on.

Adjustment

You can adjust the front fog lamp aimingslightly for driving comfort.

Note: Fog lamp adjustment must meet thelocal regulation requirements.

1. Position the unloaded vehicle on a flat,level surface.

2. Seat one person in the driver’s seat.

3. Start the engine so that the batteryremains charged.

4. Turn the front fog lamp on.

5. Adjust the fog lamp aiming such thatthe cut off line is not more than X: 20m (65.6 ft).

45

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Lighting

Page 48: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 48/266

REAR FOG LAMPS WARNINGS

Only use the rear fog lamps whenvisibility is restricted to less than 50

meters (164 feet).Do not use the rear fog lamps whenit is raining or snowing and visibilityis more than 50 meters (164 feet).

Note: You cannot switch the rear fog lampson unless you have switched the headlamps and front fog lamp on.

HEADLAMP LEVELING

Without headlamp levelingA

With headlamp levelingB

You can adjust the level of the headlampbeams according to the vehicle load.

46

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Lighting

Page 49: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 49/266

Raised headlamp beamsA

Lowered headlamp beamsB

Set the headlamp leveling control to zerowhen your vehicle is unloaded. Set it toprovide illumination between 35 and 100meters (114 and 328 feet) when yourvehicle is partially or fully loaded.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

Right-hand sideA

Left-hand sideB

APPROACH LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)

The side repeaters, number plate lamp and

the puddle lamps will come on and staysilluminated for 25 seconds when thevehicle is unlocked with the remote control.

If you open a door the light will stay onuntil:

• The door is closed

• Ignition is turned on

• 10 minutes

INTERIOR LAMPSCourtesy lamp

OffA

Door contactB

OnC

If you set the switch to position B, thecourtesy lamp will come on when youunlock or open a door. If you leave a dooropen with the ignition switch off, thecourtesy lamp will go off automaticallyafter some time to prevent the vehiclebattery from discharging. To switch it backon, switch on the ignition for a short time.

The courtesy lamp will also come on whenyou switch off the ignition. It will go offautomatically after a short time or whenyou start or restart the engine.

47

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Lighting

Page 50: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 50/266

If you set the switch to position C with theignition switch off, the courtesy lamp willcome on. It will go off automatically aftera short time to prevent the vehicle battery

from discharging. To switch it back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.

Reading lamps

If you switch off the ignition, the readinglamps will go off automatically after sometime to prevent the vehicle battery fromdischarging. To switch them back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.

48

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Lighting

Page 51: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 51/266

POWER WINDOWS

WARNINGS

Do not leave children unattended inyour vehicle and do not let them playwith the power windows. They may

seriously injure themselves.

When closing the power windows,you should verify they are free ofobstructions and make sure that

children and pets are not in the proximityof the window openings.

Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when just one of the windows is open. Lower theopposite window slightly to reduce this noise.

Press the switch to open the window.

Lift the switch to close the window.

Note: Window operation may stop or delay during low battery conditions and engine starting.

Note: If you repeatedly open and close thewindow several times within one minute,the system may disable to protect the motors from overheating.

Note: If you operate both the switch on the relevant door and the switch for thatwindow on the driver ’  s door at the sametime, the window will stop moving.

One-Touch Down (If Equipped)

Press the switch fully and release it. Pressagain or lift it to stop the window.

One-Touch Up (If Equipped)

Lift the switch fully and release it. Press orlift it again to stop the window.

Window Lock

Press the control to lock or unlock the rearwindow controls.

Bounce-Back (If Equipped)

The window will stop automatically while

closing. It will reverse some distance ifthere is an obstacle in the way.

Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature

WARNING

When you override the bounce-backfeature the window will not reverseif it detects an obstacle. Take care

when closing the windows to avoidpersonal injury or damage to your vehicle.

49

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Windows and Mirrors

Page 52: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 52/266

Proceed as follows to override thisprotection feature when there is aresistance, for example in winter:

1. Close the window twice until it reachesthe point of resistance and let itreverse.

2. Close the window a third time to thepoint of resistance. The bounce-backfeature is now disabled and you canclose the window manually. Thewindow will go past the point ofresistance and you can close it fully.

See an authorized dealer as soon aspossible if the window does not close after

the third attempt.

Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature

WARNING

The bounce-back feature remainsturned off until you reset thememory.

In an event of a flat battery or if you havedisconnected the battery, you must resetthe bounce-back memory separately foreach window.

1. Open the window.

2. Lift and hold the switch to secondaction point until the window is fullyclosed.

3. Hold the switch lifted for one moresecond and release.

4. Open the window using the first action

point and try to close it automaticallyusing second action point.

5. If the window does not open or closeautomatically when the switch ispressed or lifted to second actionpoints, repeat the procedure.

Safety Mode

WARNING

Bounce-back feature is not active insafety mode.

If the system detects a malfunction, itenters a safety mode. The windows willmove for only about 0.5 seconds at a timeand then stop. Close the windows bypulling the switch again when the windowsstop moving. Have this checkedimmediately.

Accessory Delay  (If Equipped)

You can use the window switches forseveral minutes after you have switchedthe ignition off or until either front door isopened.

INTERIOR MIRROR

WARNING

Do not adjust the mirror when yourvehicle is moving.

Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of  any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other  petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning products.

You can adjust the interior mirror to yourpreference. Some mirrors also have asecond pivot point. This lets you move themirror head up or down and from side to

side.

Pull the tab below the mirror toward youto reduce glare at night.

50

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Windows and Mirrors

Page 53: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 53/266

Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)

Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror. Mirror performance

 may be affected. A rear center passenger or  raised rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor.

The mirror will dim automatically to reduceglare when bright lights are detected frombehind your vehicle. It will automaticallyreturn to normal reflection when you selectreverse gear to make sure you have a clearview when backing up.

EXTERIOR MIRRORSPower Exterior Mirrors

WARNING

Do not adjust the mirrors when yourvehicle is moving. This could resultin the loss of control of your vehicle,

serious personal injury or death.

Left-hand mirrorA

OffB

Right-hand mirrorC

Press the controller in the direction of the

arrows to adjust the mirror.The power exterior mirrors are fitted witha heating element that will defrost ordemist the mirror glass.  See HeatedWindows and Mirrors (page 70).

Manual Folding and Unfolding

The power folding mirrors operate with theignition on, and for several minutes afteryou switch the ignition off.

Note: They will no longer operate if you switch the ignition off and open a door.

Press the button to fold or unfold themirrors.

Press the button again to stop and reversethe direction of movement.

51

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Windows and Mirrors

Page 54: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 54/266

Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors

Push the mirror toward the door windowglass. Make sure that you fully engage the

mirror in its support when returning it to itsoriginal position.

SLIDING WINDOWS

52

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Windows and Mirrors

Page 55: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 55/266

GAUGES

TachometerA

Fuel gaugeB

Engine coolant temperaturegauge

C

SpeedometerD

Illumination dimming buttonE

Information displayF

Trip computer display select andreset button

G

Tachometer

Indicates the engine speed in revolutionsper minute. Driving with your tachometerpointer continuously at the top of the scalemay damage the engine.

Fuel Gauge

Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge willindicate approximately how much fuel isleft in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge mayvary slightly when your vehicle is movingor on a gradient. The arrow adjacent to thefuel pump symbol indicates on which sideof the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge

WARNING

Never remove the coolant reservoircap while the engine is running or hot.

At normal operating temperature, theneedle will remain in the center section.

Note: Do not restart the engine until thecause of overheating has been resolved.

If the needle enters the red section, theengine is overheating. Stop the engine,

switch the ignition off and determine thecause once the engine has cooled down.See Trip Computer (page 61).

Information Display 

• Odometer/Tripodometer/Instantaneous FuelConsumption

• Outside Air Temperature (if equipped)

• Trip Computer See Trip Computer

(page 61).• Average Fuel Consumption

• Distance to Empty

WARNING LAMPS ANDINDICATORS

The following warning lamps andindicators as applicable will come onbriefly when you switch the ignition on to

confirm that the system is operational:• ABS warning lamp

• Vehicle immobilizer indicator

• Brake system warning lamp

• Ignition warning lamp

• Airbag warning lamp

• Low fuel level warning lamp

• Stability control (ESP) indicator

53

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Instrument Cluster

Page 56: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 56/266

• Oil pressure warning lamp

• Oil Change Reminder Indicator (Dieselonly)

•Engine warning lamps

• Four-wheel drive indicator

• Four-wheel drive low (4L) indicator

• Electronic locking differential (ELD)indicator

• Water-in-fuel indicator (Diesel only)

• Washer fluid level indicator

• DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter)

• Ice/Frost warning indicator

ABS warning lamp

If it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. You will continue

to have normal braking (without ABS).Have the system checked by a properlytrained technician as soon as possible.

Vehicle immobilizer indicator

The immobilizer indicator willblink if the key is removed fromthe ignition or a wrong key is

inserted.

Brake system warning lamp

It illuminates when the parkingbrake is engaged.

WARNING

Reduce your speed gradually andstop your vehicle as soon as it is safeto do so. Use your brakes with care.

If it illuminates when you are driving, checkthat the parking brake is not engaged. Ifthe parking brake is not engaged, thisindicates a malfunction. Have the system

checked by a properly trained technicianimmediately.

Ignition warning lamp

If it illuminates when driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Switchoff all unnecessary electrical

equipment. Have your vehicle checked byan authorised dealer immediately.

Airbag warning lampIf it illuminates while driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Havethis checked as soon as possible.

Low fuel level warning lamp

If the low fuel level warning lampcomes on, refuel as soon aspossible.

The arrow adjacent to the fuel pumpsymbol tells you on which side of yourvehicle the fuel filler cap is located.

Stability control (ESP) indicator

While driving, it flashes duringactivation of the system. Afterswitching on the ignition, if it

does not illuminate or illuminatescontinuously while driving, this indicates amalfunction. During a malfunction, thesystem switches off. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technicianas soon as possible.

If you switch ESP off, thewarning lamp will flash twiceand remain illuminated. The

lamp will go out when you switch thesystem back on or when you switch theignition off.

54

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Instrument Cluster

Page 57: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 57/266

Oil pressure warning lamp

CAUTION

Do not resume your journey if the oilpressure warning lamp comes ondespite the oil level being correct.

Have this checked immediately.

If the oil pressure warning lampcomes on when you are driving,this indicates a malfunction.

Stop, and switch the engine off and checkthe engine oil level.  See Engine Oil Check(page 158).

Oil Change Reminder Indicator(Diesel only)

The oil change reminderindicator informs that the enginerequires an engine oil change due

to excessive build up of soot within theengine oil.

Engine warning lamps

Malfunction indicator lamp

Powertrain warning lamp

All vehicles

If either lamp illuminates when the engineis running, this indicates a fault. The enginewill continue to run but it may have limitedpower. If it flashes when you are driving,reduce the speed of your vehicleimmediately. If it continues to flash, avoidheavy acceleration or deceleration. Havethe system checked by a properly trainedtechnician immediately.

WARNING

Have this checked immediately.

If both lamps illuminate together, stop yourvehicle as soon as it is safe to do so(continued use may cause reduced powerand cause the engine to stop). Turn theignition off and attempt to restart theengine. If the engine restarts have thesystem checked by a properly trainedtechnician immediately. If the engine doesnot restart the vehicle must be checkedbefore continuing your journey.

Four-wheel drive indicator

The four-wheel drive indicatorlamp will come on when thetransfer shift switch is in the 4H

or 4L position. This will flash whileengaging to 4H or 4L.  See UsingFour-Wheel Drive (page 97).

Four-wheel drive low (4L)

indicatorThe four-wheel drive low (4L)indicator lamp will come onwhen the transfer shift switch is

in 4L position. It will flash while engagingto 4L position.  See Using Four-WheelDrive (page 97).

Electronic locking differential(ELD) indicator

The ELD indicator lamp willcome on when the reardifferential is locked. The lamp

will flash if an error has been detected orif the engage or disengage request cannotbe completed.  See Using Four-WheelDrive (page 97).

55

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Instrument Cluster

Page 58: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 58/266

Water-in-fuel indicator (Dieselonly)

The water-in-fuel indicator lamp

will come on if there is excesswater in the fuel filter. Drain off

the water immediately.  See Draining theFuel Filter Water Trap (page 160).

Washer fluid level indicator

It illuminates when thewindshield washer fluid levelgoes below the minimum mark.

See Washer Fluid Check (page 161).

DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter)

If this illuminates, have thesystem checked by a properlytrained technician as soon as

possible.

Ice/Frost warning indicator

WARNING

Even if the temperature rises toabove +4°C (39°F) there is noguarantee that the road is free of

hazards caused by inclement weather.

It will illuminate and glow orangewhen the outside airtemperature is between 4°C and

0°C (39°F and 32°F). It will glow red whenthe temperature is below 0°C (32°F).

Door open warning lamp

The door open warning lamp willcome on when you switch theignition on and if you have not

closed the doors properly.

Glow plug indicator - For Diesel vehicles

See Starting a Diesel Engine

(page 84).

Direction indicators

Right side turn indicator

Left side turn indicator

The direction indicator will flash when youuse the direction indicators. A suddenincrease in the rate of flashing warns of afailed bulb.

Headlamp indicator

The headlamp indicator will

come on when you switch theside and tail lamps on.

High beam indicator

The high beam indicator willcome on when you switch theheadlamp high beam on. It will

flash when you use the headlamp flasher.

Front fog lamp indicator

The front fog lamp indicator willcome on when you switch thefront fog lamps on.

Rear fog lamp indicator

The rear fog lamp indicator lampwill come on when you switchthe rear fog lamps on.

56

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Instrument Cluster

Page 59: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 59/266

Safety belt indicator

See Safety Belt Minder (page26).

Gear shift indicator lamp (Manualonly)

It will illuminate to inform youthat shifting to a higher gear maygive better fuel economy and

lower CO2 emissions.

Cruise control

It will illuminate when you haveset a speed using the cruisecontrol system.

AUDIBLE WARNINGS ANDINDICATORS

Door open warning

The door open warning chime will sound

if the vehicle speed exceeds approximately10 km/h (6.2 mph) and you have notclosed the doors.

Lights on warning

The lights on warning chime will sound ifyou the key is not in position II or III andopen any door before switching off thelights.

Not in park warning

The not in park warning chime will soundif the automatic transmission lever is notin park position and you open the driverdoor.

Parking brake warning

The parking brake warning chime willsound if the parking brake is left engaged

and the vehicle speed exceedsapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Restraints back-up warning

The restraints back-up warning chime willsound if there is a malfunction in therestraints warning lamp. 5 sets of 5 tonebursts will be heard every 30 minutes.

Low fuel level warning

Low fuel level warning chime will soundwhen the low fuel level warning lamp isactivated and/or the information displayis showing 80, 40, 20, 0 km (50, 25, 10, 0miles) remaining.

Direction indicator

The direction indicator chime will soundwhen the left or right direction indicator isactivated.

Direction indicators warningThe direction indicator warning chime willsound if the left or right direction indicatoris left on and driven for more thanapproximately 3.2 km (1.98 miles).

One side park light

One side park light chime will sound whenthe one side park light is activated.

Home safeHome safe warning chime will sound whenthe home safe lighting is activated.

Safety belt minder

The safety belt warning chime will soundif the driver or passenger safety belt isunbuckled and the vehicle speed exceedsapproximately 25 km/h (15.5 mph).

57

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Instrument Cluster

Page 60: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 60/266

Alarm warning

The alarm warning chime will sound if thevehicle is unlocked with the mechanical

key and not the remote key. The chime willsound for up to 12 seconds until the unlockbutton is pressed on the remote key or acorrectly coded key is inserted into theignition and turned to position II or III. If 12second elapses before this occurs, thevehicle alarm will sound.

Key in ignition warning

The key in ignition warning chime willsound if the key is inserted into the ignition

(but not turned to position II or III) and thedriver door is opened.

Over speed warning

Over speed warning chime will sound if thevehicle speed exceeds approximately 120km/h (74.5 mph) indicated.

Low washer fluid warning

Low washer fluid warning chime will sound

if the washer fluid level in the washerbottle is low.

Missed lock warning

Missed lock warning chime will sound ifthe door is not locked after pressing thelock button.

Note: This feature is default off. To activateit, contact your Ford dealer.

58

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Instrument Cluster

Page 61: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 61/266

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash andinjury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. We recommendagainst the use of any hand-held devicewhile driving and encourage the use ofvoice-operated systems when possible.Make sure you are aware of all applicable

local laws that may affect the use ofelectronic devices while driving.

Note: The information display will remainon for several minutes after you switch theignition off.

Gear display (Automatictransmission)

A

Trip computer displayB

Odometer displayC

Device List

There are various icons placed around thedisplay screen which light up when a

function is active (for example CD, Radioor Aux).

Information Display Controls

Various systems on your vehicle can becontrolled using the information displaycontrols on your audio unit. Correspondinginformation is displayed in the information

display.To use the controls:

• Press the up or down arrow button toscroll through and highlight the optionswithin a menu.

• Press the right arrow button to enter asubmenu.

• Press the left arrow button to exit asubmenu.

• Press and hold the left arrow button at

any time to return to the main menudisplay.

• Press the OK button to choose andconfirm settings or messages.

Menu Structure - InformationDisplay 

You can access the menu using theinformation display control.

59

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Information Displays

Page 62: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 62/266

Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items areoptional.

Menu

Route optionsNavigation

Map display

Assistance options

Personal data

Reset all settings

Adaptive volumeAudio settings

Sound

NAV audio mixing

DSP settings

DSP equalizer

Traffic

News

Alt. frequency

RDS Regional

Bluetooth

Auto time (GPS)Clock settings

Set time

Set date

Set time zone

Summer time

24-hour mode

60

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Information Displays

Page 63: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 63/266

CLOCK

For detailed instructions on how to adjustthe clock See

Setting the clock on theaudio unit (page 214).

TRIP COMPUTER

Controls

For item location: See Gauges (page 53)..

Press the SET/RESET button less than 2seconds to:

•Select between the trip computerdisplays

Press and hold the SET/RESET buttonfor more than two seconds to:

• Reset trip A

• Reset trip B

• Reset average fuel consumption

• Reset average speed

The trip computer display includes thefollowing information displays:

Tripmeter (A and B)

61

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Information Displays

Page 64: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 64/266

Registers the mileage of individualjourneys.

Distance to empty 

Indicates the approximate distance thevehicle will travel on the fuel remaining inthe tank. Changes in driving pattern maycause the value to vary.

Average fuel consumption

Indicates the average fuel consumptionsince the function was last reset.

Instantaneous fuel consumption

Indicates the current average fuelconsumption.

62

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Information Displays

Page 65: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 65/266

Average speed

Indicates the average speed calculated

since the function was last reset.

Outside air temperature

Shows the outside air temperature.

Note: The position of the trip computer display may vary depending on theinformation shown in the display.

PERSONALIZED SETTINGS

Language setting

Language set menu activeA

Language title displayB

A choice of eleven languages are availablefrom 01 to 11 in the order shown below:

01: English - GB

02: Swedish - S

03: German - D

04: Dutch - NL

05: French - F

06: Italian - I

07: Spanish - E

08: Portuguese - P

09: Turkish - TR

10: Russian - RUS

11: Polish - PLTo enter the language set menu:

1. With ignition off, press and hold thelight dimming button. For item location:See Gauges (page 53).  and switchignition to on.

2. The display will show the language setmenu active.

63

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Information Displays

Page 66: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 66/266

3. Press the SET/RESET to selectbetween the different languages.

4. Press and hold the SET/RESET

button to set the currently displayedlanguage.

5. A chime will be heard to confirm theselection.

6. The display will then return to normaloperation.

Units of measure

To select metric or imperial units foroutside temperature display:

1. Change display mode to "OutsideTemperature."

2. Press and hold the SET/RESETbutton for more than two seconds andthe units will change.

Toggling the units of measure using thisdisplay will affect the following displays:

• Outside air temperature.

• The temperature display in theautomatic climate control.

• The set temperature in themulti-function display.

64

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Information Displays

Page 67: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 67/266

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Outside Air

Keep the air intakes in front of thewindshield free from obstruction (such assnow or leaves) to allow the climatecontrol system to function effectively.

Recirculated Air

WARNING

Prolonged use of recirculated air maycause the windows to mist up. If thewindows mist up, follow the settings

for demisting the windshield.

The air currently in the passengercompartment recirculates. Outside air doesnot enter your vehicle.

Heating

Heating performance depends on thetemperature of the engine coolant.

Air ConditioningNote: The air conditioning operates only when the temperature is above 39°F (4°C).

Note: When you use air conditioning, your vehicle uses more fuel.

The system directs air through theevaporator for cooling. The evaporatorextracts humidity from the air to help keepthe windows free of mist. The systemdirects the resulting condensation to the

outside of your vehicle, which may causea small pool to form under your vehicle.This is normal.

General Information on Controllingthe Interior Climate

Fully close all the windows.

Warming the Interior

Direct the air toward your feet. In cold orhumid weather conditions, direct some of

the air toward the windshield and the doorwindows.

Cooling the Interior

Direct the air toward your face.

AIR VENTS

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL

Air distribution control

Face levelA

Face level and footwellB

65

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Climate Control

Page 68: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 68/266

FootwellC

Footwell and windshieldD

WindshieldEYou can set the air distribution control toany of the indicated positions. A smallamount of air is directed towards thewindshield in positions B and C.

Blower

OffA

Temperature control

ColdBlue

WarmRed

Maximum coolingA/CMAX

Recirculated air

Press the recirculated air button to togglebetween outside air and recirculated air.

System settings

Note: Set all controls to the positions shown.

Heating the interior quickly 

Select the outside air.

66

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Climate Control

Page 69: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 69/266

Ventilation

Face level and footwellA

Face levelB

Set the air distribution control to positionA or position B. Set the blower andtemperature to any position and select theoutside air. Open the air vents to suitindividual requirements.

Switching the air conditioning on andoff

Press the A/C button to switch the airconditioning on and off.

Cooling with outside air

Switch the air conditioning on and selectthe outside air.

Cooling the interior quickly 

Selecting the A/C MAX will providemaximum occupant cooling. To switch theA/C MAX off deselect the A/C or

recirculated air.

Defrosting and demisting thewindshield quickly 

Selecting air to windshield willautomatically switch the A/C on and selectthe outside air.

Reducing interior air humidity 

67

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Climate Control

Page 70: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 70/266

Selecting air to windshield willautomatically switch the A/C on and selectthe outside air.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATECONTROL

The system controls the temperature,amount and distribution of the air flowautomatically and adjusts them accordingto the driving and weather conditions. Ashort press of the AUTO button onceswitches on the auto mode.

Note: When in AUTO, ensure that thetemperature is set to the desired level 22°C (71°F) is preferred).

Note: If the climate control is operated,information relating to this system isdisplayed in the information display.  SeeInformation Displays (page 59).

Note: Avoid adjusting the settings whenthe vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold.The automatic climate control adjusts tothe current circumstances automatically.

For the system to function properly, the side and center vents should be fully open.

Note: The sunload sensor is located on topof the instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor with any objects.

Note: The in car temperature sensor islocated behind the grill below the air distribution control. Do not cover the grillwith any objects.

Note: At low outside temperatures, when

the system is in auto mode, the air flow will be low and the air stream will be directed to the windshield and the side windows aslong as the engine is cold.

Air distribution control

WindshieldA

Face levelB

FootwellC

To adjust air distribution, press the desiredbutton. The combination of settings thatcan be selected are

A,

B,

C,

A and C and

B and C.

Blower

68

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Climate Control

Page 71: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 71/266

Note: When the blower is in AUTO mode, no blower setting indicators will beilluminated.

When the blower speed is controlledmanually by operationg the blower dial,the blower setting is indicated in thedisplay above the air distribution controls.

To return to auto mode, short press theAUTO button.

Temperature control

You can set the temperature between 16°C(61°F) and 28°C (82°F) in steps of 0.5°C(1°F). In position LO (below 16°C (61°F))the system will switch to permanentcooling, in HI (above 28°C (82°F)) topermanent heating, and not regulate astable temperature.

Mono ModeIn Mono mode the temperature settingsfor both the driver’s and passenger’s sideare linked. If you adjust the temperatureusing the rotary control on the driver’s side,the settings will be adjusted to the samesetting on the passenger’s side.

To switch dual mode on

Long press of the AUTO button orselecting the temperature for the

passenger’s side with the rotary control on

the passenger’s side. The temperature forthe driver’s side will remain unchanged.You can now adjust the driver andpassenger side temperaturesindependently. The temperature settingsfor each side are shown in the display. Youcan set a temperature difference of up to4°C (8°F).

Note: If you set a temperature differenceof greater than 4°C (8°F), the temperature

on the other side will be adjusted so thatthe difference remains 4°C (8°F).

To switch dual mode off

Press the AUTO button for three secondsor select HI or LO on the driver's side. Thepassenger’s side temperature will beadjusted to the driver’s side temperature.

Recirculated air

Press the recirculated air button to togglebetween fresh air and recirculated air.

Note: When the system is in auto mode and the interior and exterior temperatures arequite hot, the system selects recirculated  air automatically to maximize cooling of theinterior. Once the selected temperature is reached, the system will reselect outside air  automatically.

Cooling the interior quickly 

69

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Climate Control

Page 72: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 72/266

Selecting the A/C MAX will providemaximum occupant cooling. A secondpress of the A/C MAX button will switchthe A/C MAX off.

Windshield defrosting anddemisting

Press the MAX defrost button for quickdemisting of the windshield.

Fresh air will flow into the vehicle and A/Cis automatically selected. The blowerspeed, temperature control and fresh airoperate automatically and cannot beadjusted in this mode. The blower is set tomaximum speed and the temperature toHI.

When you select MAX defrost, the heatedwindows switch on automatically andswitch off after a preset time.

A second press of the MAX defrost button

will return the system to the previoussettings.

To return to auto mode, short press theAUTO button.

Switching the air conditioning onand off

Press the A/C button to switch the airconditioning on and off. The light in thebutton indicates the status of the A/C.

Note: The A/C operates only when theengine is running.

Switching off the automaticclimate control

Press the power button to switch thesystem on and off. When switched off,recirculated air is selected but it is alsopossible to manually select the fresh air.

HEATED WINDOWS ANDMIRRORS

Note: Make sure the engine is running before operating the heated windows.

Heated Windshield

Press the button to clear the window ofthin ice and fog.

Heated Rear Window

Press the button to clear the window ofthin ice and fog. Press the button againwithin 10 minutes to switch it off. Itswitches off automatically after 10minutes, or when you switch the ignition

off.Note:  Do not use razor blades or other  sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals from the insideof the rear window. This may cause damageto the heated grid lines and will not becovered by your warranty.

70

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Climate Control

Page 73: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 73/266

Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)

Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrorswith a scraper or attempt to readjust the

 mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.

Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of  any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other  petroleum-based cleaning products.

Both mirrors are heated to remove ice, mistand fog when the heated rear window isswitched on.

71

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Climate Control

Page 74: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 74/266

SITTING IN THE CORRECTPOSITION

WARNINGSDo not recline the seatback too faras this can cause the occupant toslide under the safety belt, resulting

in serious injury in the event of a collision.

Sitting improperly, out of position orwith the seatback reclined too far,can result in serious injury or death

in the event of a collision. Always situpright against your seatback, with yourfeet on the floor.

Do not place objects higher than theseatback to reduce the risk of seriousinjury in the event of a collision or

during heavy braking.

When you use them properly, the seat,head restraint, safety belt and air bags will

provide optimum protection in the eventof a collision.

We recommend that you follow theseguidelines:

• Sit in an upright position with the baseof your spine as far back as possible.

• Do not recline the seatback more than30 degrees.

• Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of it is level with the top of yourhead and as far forward as possible.Make sure that you remain

comfortable.

• Keep sufficient distance betweenyourself and the steering wheel. Werecommend a minimum of 10 inches(25 centimeters) between yourbreastbone and the air bag cover.

• Hold the steering wheel with your armsslightly bent.

• Bend your legs slightly so that you canpress the pedals fully.

• Position the shoulder strap of thesafety belt over the center of yourshoulder and position the lap straptightly across your hips.

Make sure that your driving position iscomfortable and that you can maintain fullcontrol of your vehicle.

MANUAL SEATS

WARNINGSUse seat covers designed for seatswith side airbags. Have these fittedby an authorized dealer.

Do not adjust the driver seat whenyour vehicle is moving.

Note: Seat covers fitted to your vehicle as part of a special equipment pack arewashable without removing them from the

 seats.

Note: Seat covers are designed and fitted to work with the seat's existing features and  safety systems, and should not require adjustment. If seat cover removal and installation is required, see an authorized Ford dealer.

72

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Seats

Page 75: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 75/266

Moving the Seat Backward andForward

WARNINGS

Make sure the driver seat fully locksinto place by rocking it backward and

forward.Do not move the front seats tooclose to the instrument panel.

Adjusting the Lumbar Support

Adjusting the Height of the

Driver's Seat

73

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Seats

Page 76: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 76/266

Recline Adjustment

Folding the Seatback - Stretch cab

Folding the front passenger seat allowseasy access to the rear seat.

Bench seat

POWER SEATS

WARNINGS

Use seat covers designed for seatswith side airbags. Have these fittedby an authorized dealer.

Do not adjust the driver seat whenyour vehicle is moving.

Do not place cargo or any objectsbehind the seatback before returningit to the original position.

Note: Seat covers fitted to your vehicle as

 part of a special equipment pack arewashable without removing them from the seats.

Note: Seat covers are designed and fitted to work with the seat's existing features and  safety systems, and should not require adjustment. If seat cover removal and installation is required, see an authorized Ford dealer.

74

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Seats

Page 77: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 77/266

Moving the Seat Backward andForward

WARNING

Do not move the front seats tooclose to the instrument panel.

Adjusting the Height of theDriver's Seat

Recline Adjustment

75

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Seats

Page 78: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 78/266

Tilting the Seat

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNINGS

Raise the rear head restraint whenthe rear seat is occupied by apassenger.

When front seats are in use the headrestraints must not be removed.

Adjusting the head restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the topof it is level with the top of your head.

Removing the head restraints

Front head restraints

Press locking button 1 and at the sametime release the retaining clip 2 using asuitable implement.

Rear outer head restraints

Pull to move the head restraint upward.Press the locking button 1 to lower thehead restraint or to remove the head

restraint.

REAR SEATS

Note: Stow the rear seat belt tongue intothe pockets provided in the sides of the rear  seat back to prevent rattling when not inuse.

76

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Seats

Page 79: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 79/266

Note: Seat covers fitted to your vehicle as part of a special equipment pack arewashable without removing them from the seats.

Note: Seat covers are designed and fitted to work with the seat's existing features and  safety systems, and should not require adjustment. If seat cover removal and installation is required, see an authorized Ford dealer.

Folding the Seat Cushion

Stretch cab

Double cab

Unfolding the Seat Cushion

Note: The cushion tether strap must be stowed in the pocket provided.

Folding the Seatback

Double cab

WARNINGS

When folding the seatbacks down,take care not to get your fingerscaught between the seatback and

seat frame.

Do not use the rear surface of the

rear seat back as a load floor.Do not de-latch and fold theseatback when the seat cushion isfolded up.

1. Pull the release strap upward.

2. Push the seatback forward.

77

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Seats

Page 80: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 80/266

Unfolding the Seatback

Double cab

WARNINGSWhen folding the seatbacks up,make sure that the safety belts arevisible to an occupant and not

caught behind the seat.

Make sure that the seats and theseatbacks are secure and fullyengaged in their catches.

HEATED SEATS

WARNING

People who are unable to feel painto their skin because of advancedage, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal

cord injury, medication, alcohol use,exhaustion or other physical conditions,must exercise care when using the heatedseat. The heated seat may cause burnseven at low temperatures, especially ifused for long periods of time. Do not placeanything on the seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket or cushion. Thismay cause the heated seat to overheat.Do not puncture the seat with pins, needlesor other pointed objects. This may damagethe heating element which may cause theheated seat to overheat. An overheatedseat may cause serious personal injury.

Do not do the following:

•Place heavy objects on the seat.

• Operate the heated seat if water or anyother liquid is spilled on the seat. Allowthe seat to dry thoroughly.

• Operate the heated seats unless theengine is running. Doing so could drainyour vehicle battery.

For item location: See Climate Control(page 65).

The heated seat will only operate with theignition switched on.

The maximum temperature is reached

after five or six minutes. It is regulatedthermostatically.

The heated seat will remain on until eitherthe heated seat switch or the ignition isswitched off.

Adjust the control to the desired heatsetting.

78

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Seats

Page 81: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 81/266

12 Volt DC Power Point

WARNING

Do not plug optional electricalaccessories into the cigar lightersocket. Incorrect use of the lighter

can cause damage not covered by yourwarranty, and can result in fire or seriousinjury.

Note: When you switch the ignition on, youcan use the socket to power 12 volt appliances with a maximum current ratingof 20 amps.

 After you switch the ignition off the power  supply will only work for a maximum of 30 minutes.Note: Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point. Thiswill damage the outlet and blow the fuse.

Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or  accessory bracket from the plug.

Note: Do not use the power point over thevehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watt or a

fuse may blow.Note: Do not use the power point for operating a cigar lighter element.

Note: Incorrect use of the power point cancause damage not covered by your warranty.

Note: Always keep the power point capsclosed when not in use.

Run the engine for full capacity use of thepower point.

To prevent the battery from running out ofcharge:

• Do not use the power point longer thannecessary when the engine is notrunning.

• Do not leave devices plugged inovernight or when your vehicle isparked for extended periods.

Location

Power points may be found:

• on the center stack.

CIGAR LIGHTER

Note: Do not hold the cigar lighter element pressed in.

Note: If you use the socket when the engineis not running, the battery may lose charge.

Note: When you switch the ignition on, youcan use the socket to power 12 volt

 appliances with a maximum current ratingof 20 amps.

Note: After you switch the ignition off the power supply will only work for a maximumof 30 minutes.

Note: Use only Ford accessory connectorsor connectors specified for use with SAE  standard sockets.

Press the element in to use the cigar

lighter. It will pop out automatically.

79

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Auxiliary Power Points

Page 82: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 82/266

CUP HOLDERS

WARNING

Do not place hot drinks in the cupholders when your vehicle is moving.

GLOVE BOX

Driver Side

Passenger Side

CENTER CONSOLE

80

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Storage Compartments

Page 83: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 83/266

COOL BOX

OpenA

CloseB

ASHTRAY

You can place the removable ashtray inany of the cup holders.

GLASSES HOLDER (IF EQUIPPED)

The glasses must be placed in the glassesholder with the lenses facing downwardas shown in the picture. If not, the glasses

can fall down when the glasses holder isopen.

REAR SEAT ARMREST

1. Push the armrest into the seatback andhold.

2. Pull the strap and open the armrest.

81

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Storage Compartments

Page 84: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 84/266

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGS

Extended idling at high enginespeeds can produce very hightemperatures in the engine and

exhaust system, creating the risk of fire orother damage.

Do not park, idle or drive your vehicleon dry grass or other dry groundcover. The emission system heats up

the engine compartment and exhaustsystem, creating the risk of fire.

Do not start the engine in a closedgarage or in other enclosed areas.Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always

open the garage door before you start theengine.

If you smell exhaust fumes insideyour vehicle, have it checked by aFord Dealer immediately. Do not

drive your vehicle if you smell exhaustfumes.

If you disconnect the battery, your vehiclemay exhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics for approximately 8kilometers after you reconnect it. This isbecause the engine management systemmust realign itself with the engine. You candisregard any unusual drivingcharacteristics during this period.

When you start the engine, avoid pressingthe accelerator pedal before and duringoperation. Only use the accelerator pedalwhen you have difficulty starting theengine.

IGNITION SWITCH

0(off) - The ignition is off.

Note: When you switch the ignition off and leave your vehicle, do not leave your key inthe ignition. This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge.

I (accessory) - Allows the electricalaccessories such as the radio to operatewhile the engine is not running.

Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long to avoid your vehicle battery losing charge.

II (on) - All electrical circuits operational.

Warning lamps and indicators areilluminated.

III (start) - cranks the engine. Release thekey as soon as the engine starts.

STEERING WHEEL LOCK

WARNING

Always check that the steering isunlocked before attempting to move

your vehicle.

Vehicles without Keyless Starting

To lock the steering wheel:

1. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

2. Rotate the steering wheel slightly toengage the lock.

82

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Page 85: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 85/266

Unlocking the Steering Wheel

Vehicles With Automatic Transmission

Switch the ignition on or press the brakepedal.

Vehicles With Manual Transmission

Switch the ignition on or press the clutchpedal.

STARTING A GASOLINEENGINE

Note: You can only operate the starter 10 seconds. The number of start attempts islimited to approximately six. If you exceed this limit, the system does not allow you totry again for about 30 minutes.

Cold or Hot Engine

Vehicles with Manual Transmission

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

Note: Releasing the clutch pedal while theengine is starting stops the engine cranking and returns the ignition to on.

1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.

2. Start the engine.

Vehicles with Automatic Transmission

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P or N.

3. Start the engine.

All Vehicles

If the engine does not start within 10seconds, wait for a short period and tryagain.

If the engine does not start after threeattempts, wait 10 seconds and follow theflooded engine procedure.

If you have difficulty starting the enginewhen the temperature is below -13°F(-25°C), press the accelerator pedal to themid-way point of its travel and try again.

Flooded Engine

Vehicles with Manual Transmission

1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal andhold it there.

3. Start the engine.

Vehicles with Automatic Transmission

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Move the transmission selector leverto position P or N.

3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal andhold it there.

4. Start the engine.

All Vehicles

If the engine does not start, repeat the coldor hot engine procedure.

Engine Idle Speed after Starting

The speed at which the engine idlesimmediately after starting minimizesvehicle emissions and maximizes cabincomfort and fuel economy.

The idle speed varies depending on certainfactors. These include vehicle componentand ambient temperatures as well aselectrical and climate system demands.

83

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Page 86: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 86/266

Failure to Start

Vehicles with Manual Transmission

If the engine does not crank when you fulldepress the clutch pedal with the ignitionkey in position III, follow this procedure:

1. Fully depress the clutch and brakepedals.

2. Turn the key to position III until theengine has started.

STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE

Cold or Hot EngineAll Vehicles

Note: When the temperature is below 5°F (-15°C), you may need to crank the enginefor up to 10 seconds.

Note: You can only operate the starter for  a limited period of time.

Note: After a limited number of attemptsto start your engine, the system will not

 allow you to try again until a period of time has elapsed, for example 30 minutes.

Switch the ignition on and waituntil the glow plug indicator goesoff.

Vehicles With Manual Transmission

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

Note: Releasing the clutch pedal while the

engine is starting will stop the enginecranking and return to ignition on.

1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.

2. Start the engine.

Vehicles With Automatic Transmission

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

Note: Releasing the brake pedal while theengine is starting will stop the enginecranking and return to ignition on.

1. Move the transmission selector leverto position P or N.

2. Fully depress the brake pedal.

3. Start the engine.

Failure to Start

Vehicles With Manual Transmission

If the engine does not crank when theclutch pedal has been fully depressed andthe ignition key is turned to position III.

1. Fully depress the clutch and brakepedals.

2. Turn the key to position III until theengine has started.

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER

The filter forms part of the emissionsreduction system on your vehicle. It filters

harmful diesel particulates (soot) from theexhaust gas.

Regeneration

WARNING

Do not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The

regeneration process creates very highexhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust

will radiate a considerable amount of heatduring and after regeneration and after youhave switched the engine off. This is apotential fire hazard.

Note: Avoid running out of fuel.

84

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Page 87: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 87/266

Note: During regeneration at low speed or engine idle, you may smell a hot metallicodor and could notice a clicking metallic sound. This is due to the high temperatures

 reached during regeneration and is normal.

Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust sound may be heard during the regeneration process.

Note: After you have switched your engineoff the fans may continue to run for a short period of time.

The diesel particulate filter on your vehiclerequires periodic regeneration to maintainits correct function. Your vehicle will carryout this process automatically.

If your journeys meet one of the followingconditions:

• You drive only short distances.

• You frequently switch the ignition onand off.

• Your journeys contain a high level ofacceleration and deceleration.

You must carry out occasional trips with

the following conditions to assist theregeneration process:

• Drive your vehicle in more favorableconditions, which you will find at highervehicle speeds in normal driving, on amain road or freeway for a minimumof 20 minutes. This drive may includeshort stops that will not affect theregeneration process.

• Avoid prolonged idling and alwaysobserve speed limits and roadconditions.

• Do not switch the ignition off.

• Select a suitable gear to ideallymaintain engine speed between 1500and 3000 RPM.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE

Vehicles With a Turbocharger

WARNING

Do not switch the engine off when itis running at high speed. If you do, theturbocharger will continue running

after the engine oil pressure has droppedto zero. This will lead to prematureturbocharger bearing wear.

Release the accelerator pedal. Wait untilthe engine has reached idle speed and then

switch it off.

85

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Page 88: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 88/266

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGS

Do not overfill the fuel tank. Thepressure in an overfilled tank maycause leakage and lead to fuel spray

and fire.

The fuel system may be underpressure. If you hear a hissing soundnear the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel

capless fuel system), do not refuel untilthe sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may sprayout, which could cause serious personalinjury.

Automotive fuels can cause seriousinjury or death if misused ormishandled.

The flow of fuel through a fuel pumpnozzle can produce static electricity,which can cause a fire if fuel is

pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.

Fuel ethanol and gasoline maycontain benzene, which is acancer-causing agent.

When refueling always shut theengine off and never allow sparks oropen flames near the filler neck.

Never smoke or use a cell phone whilerefueling. Fuel vapor is extremelyhazardous under certain conditions. Avoidinhaling excess fumes.

Observe the following guidelines whenhandling automotive fuel:

• Extinguish all smoking materials andany open flames before refueling yourvehicle.

• Always turn off the vehicle beforerefueling.

• Automotive fuels can be harmful orfatal if swallowed. Fuel such asgasoline is highly toxic and ifswallowed can cause death or

permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,call a physician immediately, even if nosymptoms are immediately apparent.The toxic effects of fuel may not bevisible for hours.

• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling toomuch fuel vapor of any kind can leadto eye and respiratory tract irritation.In severe cases, excessive or prolongedbreathing of fuel vapor can causeserious illness and permanent injury.

• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. Iffuel is splashed in the eyes, removecontact lenses (if worn), flush withwater for 15 minutes and seek medicalattention. Failure to seek propermedical attention could lead topermanent injury.

• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbedthrough the skin. If fuel is splashed onthe skin, clothing or both, promptly

remove contaminated clothing andwash skin thoroughly with soap andwater. Repeated or prolonged skincontact with fuel liquid or vapor causesskin irritation.

• Be particularly careful if you are taking“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiramfor the treatment of alcoholism.Breathing gasoline vapors, or skincontact could cause an adversereaction. In sensitive individuals, serious

personal injury or sickness may result.If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptlywash skin thoroughly with soap andwater. Consult a physician immediatelyif you experience an adverse reaction.

86

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuel and Refueling

Page 89: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 89/266

FUEL QUALITY

WARNINGS

Do not mix gasoline with oil, dieselor other liquids. This could cause achemical reaction.

Do not use leaded gasoline orgasoline with additives containingother metallic compounds (e.g.

manganese-based). They could damagethe emission system.

Note: We recommend that you use only  high quality fuel.

Note: We do not recommend the use of  additional additives or other enginetreatments for normal vehicle use.

Use minimum 91 octane unleaded gasolinethat meets the specification defined by EN228 or the equivalent nationalspecification.

Your vehicle is suitable for use with ethanolblends up to 20% (E20).

Long-Term Storage

Most gasoline contains ethanol. Werecommend that you fill the fuel tank withfuel that does not contain ethanol if youintend to store your vehicle for more thantwo months. Alternatively, we recommendthat you seek advice from an authorizeddealer.

FUEL QUALITYWARNINGS

Do not mix diesel with oil, gasolineor other liquids. This could cause achemical reaction.

Do not add kerosene, paraffin orgasoline to diesel. This could causedamage to the fuel system.

WARNINGS

Use diesel that meets thespecification defined by EN 590 or

the relevant national specification.

Note: We recommend that you use only  high quality fuel.

Note: We do not recommend the use of  additional additives or other enginetreatments for normal vehicle use.

Note: We do not recommend the use of  additional additives to prevent fuel waxing.

Long-Term StorageMost diesel fuels contain biodiesel. Werecommend that you fill the fuel tank withfuel that does not contain biodiesel if youintend to store your vehicle for more thantwo months. Alternatively, we recommendthat you seek advice from your dealer.

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

Avoid running out of fuel because thissituation may have an adverse effect onengine components.

If you have run out of fuel:

• You may need to cycle the ignition fromoff to on several times after refuelingto allow the fuel system to pump thefuel from the tank to the engine. Onrestarting, cranking time will take a fewseconds longer than normal. Withkeyless ignition, just start the engine.

Crank time will be longer than usual.

• Normally, adding 3.8 liters of fuel isenough to restart the engine. If thevehicle is out of fuel and on a steepgrade, more than 3.8 liters may berequired.

87

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuel and Refueling

Page 90: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 90/266

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

WARNING

Do not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The exhaust

will radiate a considerable amount of heatduring use, and after you have switchedthe engine off. This is a potential firehazard.

Driving with a Catalytic Converter

WARNINGS

Avoid running out of fuel.

Do not crank the engine for longperiods.

Do not run the engine when a sparkplug lead is disconnected.

Do not push-start or tow-start yourvehicle. Use booster cables.  SeeJump Starting the Vehicle (page

136).Do not switch the ignition off whendriving.

REFUELING

WARNINGS

Do not attempt to start the engine ifyou have filled the fuel tank with theincorrect fuel. This could damage the

engine. Have your vehicle checked by anauthorized dealer immediately.

Do not use any kind of flames or heatnear the fuel system. The fuel systemis under pressure. There is a risk of

injury if the fuel system is leaking.

WARNINGS

If you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray the fuel

filler flap briefly from a distance notless than 8 inches (200 millimeters).

We recommend that you wait atleast 10 seconds before removing thefuel nozzle to allow any residual fuel

to drain into the fuel tank.

Stop refueling after the fuel nozzlestops the second time. Additionalfuel will fill the expansion space in

the fuel tank which could lead to fueloverflowing. Fuel spillage could be

hazardous to other road users.

Do not remove the fuel nozzle fromits fully inserted position during theentire refueling process.

Note: Central locking also locks and unlocks the fuel filler flap.  See Locking and Unlocking (page 36).

Vehicles with Fuel Filler Cap

1. Press the flap to open it.

88

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuel and Refueling

Page 91: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 91/266

2. Open the flap fully until it engages.

3. Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise.4. To close, turn the fuel filler cap

clockwise until it clicks.

5. Close and push the fuel filler flap tolock it.

Note: Disregard the hissing noise whileopening the filler cap. This is normal.

If you must replace the fuel filler cap,replace only with the cap designed for yourvehicle. The customer warranty may be

void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuelsystem if the correct genuine Ford fuel fillercap is not used.

Vehicles without Fuel Filler Cap

1. Press the flap to open it. Open the flapfully until it engages.

Note: When you insert the correct size fuel nozzle, a spring loaded inhibitor will open.This helps to avoid filling up with theincorrect fuel.

2. Insert the fuel nozzle up to andincluding the first notch on the fuelnozzle A. Keep it resting on the cover

of the fuel pipe opening.

3. Hold the fuel nozzle in position B duringrefueling. Holding the fuel nozzle inposition A can affect the flow of fueland shut off the fuel nozzle before thefuel tank is full.

89

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuel and Refueling

Page 92: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 92/266

4. Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to removeit.

Note: A funnel is located in the glove box.Use this when refilling with a fuel can.

FUEL CONSUMPTION

Note: The amount of usable fuel in theempty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gaugeindicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty  reserve still present in the fuel tank.

The CO2 and fuel consumption figures arederived from laboratory tests according toRegulation (EC) 715/2007 and subsequentamendments are carried out by all vehiclemanufacturers.

They are intended as a comparisonbetween makes and models of vehicles.They are not intended to represent the realworld fuel consumption you may get fromyour vehicle.

Real world fuel consumption is governed

by many factors including: driving style,high speed driving, stop-start driving, airconditioning usage, the accessories fitted,payload, towing, etc.

The advertised capacity is the indicatedcapacity and the empty reserve combined.Indicated capacity is the difference in theamount of fuel in the fuel tank and when

the fuel gauge indicates empty. Emptyreserve is the amount of fuel in the fueltank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.

Filling the Fuel Tank

For consistent results when refueling:

• Switch the ignition off.

• Allow no more than two automaticshut-offs when refueling.

Results are most accurate when therefueling method is consistent.

Calculating Fuel Economy 

Do not measure fuel economy during thefirst 1000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this isthe engine break-in period). A moreaccurate measurement is obtained after2500 mi (4,000 km). Also, fuel expense,frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readingsare not accurate ways to measure fuel

economy.1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record

the initial odometer reading.

2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, recordthe amount of fuel added.

3. After at least three to five fuel tank fillups, fill the fuel tank and record thecurrent odometer reading.

4. Subtract your initial odometer readingfrom the current odometer reading.

5. Calculate fuel economy by dividingmiles traveled by gallons used (ForMetric: Multiply liters used by 100, thendivide by kilometers traveled).

90

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuel and Refueling

Page 93: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 93/266

Keep a record for at least one month andrecord the type of driving (city or freeway).This provides an accurate estimate of yourvehicle’s fuel economy under current

driving conditions. Additionally, keeping

records during summer and winter showhow temperature impacts fuel economy.In general, your vehicle will use more fuelin cold temperatures.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fuel Consumption Figures

CO2 Emis-sions

CombinedExtra-UrbanUrban

Variant

g/kml/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)

24410.2 (27.7)8.2 (34.4)13.6 (20.7)Vehicles with a 2.5LDuratec-HE engine - 2-wheel drive

25910.8 (26.1)8.9 (31.7)14.1 (20.0)Vehicles with a 2.5LDuratec-HE engine - 4-wheel drive

2037.6 (37.2)6.8 (41.5)9.0 (31.4)

Vehicles with a 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi engine - 2-wheel drive (manual trans-mission - MT82)

2178.1 (34.9)7.1 (39.8)9.9 (28.5)

Vehicles with a 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi engine - 4-wheel drive (manual trans-mission - MT82)

2388.9 (31.7)7.6 (37.2)11.1 (25.4)

Vehicles with a 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi engine - 2-wheel drive (automatictransmission)

2519.4 (30.0)7.9 (35.7)12.1 (23.3)

Vehicles with a 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi engine - 4-wheel drive (automatictransmission)

2228.4 (33.6)7.0 (40.3)10.8 (26.1)

Vehicles with a 3.2LDuratorq-TDCi engine - 2-wheel drive (manual trans-mission - MT82)

91

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuel and Refueling

Page 94: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 94/266

CO2 Emis-sions

CombinedExtra-UrbanUrban

Variant

g/km

l/100 km

(mpg)

l/100 km

(mpg)

l/100 km

(mpg)

2419.1 (31.0)7.6 (37.1)11.8 (23.9)

Vehicles with a 3.2LDuratorq-TDCi engine - 4-wheel drive (manual trans-mission - MT82)

2398.9 (31.7)7.4 (38.2)11.6 (24.3)

Vehicles with a 3.2LDuratorq-TDCi engine - 2-wheel drive (automatictransmission)

2519.4 (30.0)7.9 (35.7)12 (23.5)

Vehicles with a 3.2LDuratorq-TDCi engine - 4-wheel drive (automatictransmission)

92

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuel and Refueling

Page 95: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 95/266

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Selecting Reverse Gear

Do not engage reverse gear when yourvehicle is moving. This can cause damageto the transmission.

Raise the collar when you select reversegear.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING

Always set the parking brake fullyand make sure you move the

transmission selector lever to park.Switch the ignition off and remove the keywhenever you leave your vehicle.

Selector lever positions

ParkP

ReverseR

NeutralN

DriveD

Sport mode and manual shiftingS

Manual shift upS+

Manual shift downS-

WARNING

Apply the brakes before moving theselector lever and keep them applieduntil you are ready to move off.

Note: A cold engine has a higher idle speed.This will increase the tendency for your vehicle to creep when you have selected adrive gear.

Press the button on the transmissionselector lever to select reverse and park.

The transmission selector lever positionwill be shown in the instrument clusterdisplay.

93

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Transmission

Page 96: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 96/266

P (Park)

WARNINGS

Move the transmission selector lever

to park only when your vehicle isstationary.

Apply the parking brake and movethe transmission selector lever topark before leaving your vehicle.

Make sure that the transmission selectorlever is latched in position.

Note: To move the selector lever from park position, apply the footbrake and ignition

 key in position II.In this position, power is not transmittedto the drive wheels and the transmissionis locked. You can start the engine with thetransmission selector lever in this position.

Note: An audible warning will sound if youopen the drivers door and you have not moved the transmission selector lever to park.

Note: The battery saver will deactivate the

 audible warning after a period of time.

R (Reverse)

WARNINGS

Move the transmission selector leverto reverse only when your vehicle isstationary and the engine is at idle

speed.

Always come to a complete stopbefore shifting the transmission

selector lever out of reverse.

Move the transmission selector lever toreverse to allow your vehicle to movebackward.

N (Neutral)

In this position, power is not transmittedto the drive wheels but the transmission is

not locked. You can start the engine withthe transmission selector lever in thisposition.

D (Drive)

Note: A shift will occur only when your vehicle speed and the engine speed are appropriate.

Select drive to shift automatically throughthe forward gears.

The transmission will select theappropriate gear for optimum performancebased on ambient temperature, roadgradient, vehicle load and your input.

Sport Mode and Manual Shifting

Sport mode

Note: In sport mode the transmissionoperates as normal but gears are selected  more quickly and at higher engine speeds.

Note: In sport mode S will be shown in theinstrument cluster display.

Note: When towing heavy loads or in hilly terrain, it is recommended that sport modeis selected. This will result in cooler transmission temperatures and additionalengine braking.

Switch on sport mode by moving thetransmission selector lever from driveposition towards the driver. Sport mode

will remain on until either you shiftmanually up or down the gears using +and -.

Manual shifting

WARNINGS

Do not hold the transmission selectorlever permanently in - or +.

94

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Transmission

Page 97: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 97/266

WARNINGS

The transmission will automaticallydownshift when the engine speed is

too low.

Manual shifting can be done only when theselector lever is in position S. Move thetransmission selector lever forward todownshift and backward to upshift.

When the vehicle is stationary, only the 1stand 2nd gears can be selected.

Manual shifting is sequential, thereforegears cannot be skipped.

The transmission will remain in theselected gear. When the engine speed is

too low or idle, it will downshift to 2nd gear.The selected gear is indicated in theinstrument cluster.  See GeneralInformation (page 59).

Manual mode also provides a kickdownfunction. See Kickdown.

Hints on driving with an automatictransmission

WARNING

Do not idle the engine for longperiods of time in drive with thebrakes applied.

Moving off

WARNING

It is not possible to tow-start orpush-start a vehicle fitted with anautomatic transmission.  See Jump

Starting the Vehicle (page 136).

1. Release the parking brake.

2. Release the brake pedal and press theaccelerator pedal.

Stopping

1. Release the accelerator pedal andpress the brake pedal.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Move the transmission selector leverto N or P.

Kickdown

Press the accelerator pedal fully with thetransmission selector lever in the driveposition to select the next highest gear foroptimum performance. Release theaccelerator pedal when you no longerrequire kickdown.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud orSnow

Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engineis not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.

Note: Do not rock your vehicle for morethan a minute or damage to thetransmission and tires may occur, or theengine may overheat.

95

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Transmission

Page 98: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 98/266

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,it may be rocked out by shifting betweenforward and reverse gears, stoppingbetween shifts in a steady pattern. Press

lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

Emergency Park Position ReleaseLever

WARNINGS

Do not drive your vehicle until youverify that the brake lamps areworking.

If the parking brake is fully released,but the brake warning lamp remainsilluminated, the brakes may not be

working correctly. See an authorizeddealer.

Use the button to move the transmissionselector lever from the park position in theevent of an electrical malfunction or if yourvehicle battery has no charge.

1. Apply the parking brake and switch theignition off before performing thisprocedure.

2. Lift up the cover in the center consolenext to the transmission selector leverwith a suitable tool.

3. Push down the locking button in theslot and simultaneously move theselector lever out of the P position.

Note: Take care when opening the cover.Note: See an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used.

96

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Transmission

Page 99: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 99/266

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

This system is a proactive system. It hasthe ability to anticipate wheel slip andtransfer torque to the rear wheels beforeslip occurs. Even when wheel slip is notpresent, the system is continuously makingadjustments to the torque distribution, inan attempt to improve straight line andcornering behavior, both on and off road.

The system automatically turns on everytime you switch the ignition on.

All components of the system are sealedand do not require maintenance.

USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE

Note: A clicking sound from the drive line may be heard while shifting between ranges,which is normal.

Two-Wheel Drive, High Range (2H)

Use for all normal road driving and also foroff-road driving across dry, level terrain.

Four-Wheel Drive, High Range(4H)

WARNING

Do not use four-wheel drive 4H fornormal road driving.

Use for off-road driving.

We recommend that you frequentlyinspect your vehicle's chassis componentsif your vehicle is subject to off-road use.

Note: The four-wheel drive indicator lampwill come on when the transfer shift switch

is in the 4H position.  See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 53).

Four-Wheel Drive, Low Range (4L)

WARNING

Do not use four-wheel drive 4H fornormal road driving.

Use for more extreme off-road conditions,such as steep ascents and descents.

Also use when low speed manoeuvring isnecessary, such as reversing a trailer ornegotiating a boulder-strewn river bed.

We recommend that you frequentlyinspect your vehicle's chassis componentsif your vehicle is subject to off-road use.

Note: The four-wheel drive low range 4L and four-wheel drive indicator lamps willcome on when the transfer shift switch is inthe 4L position.  See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 53).

Shifting Between 2H and 4H

Note: Shift to 2H will reactivate all the stability control (ESP) functions.

97

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Four-Wheel Drive

Page 100: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 100/266

Shift between 2H and 4H can be done withthe vehicle moving up to 68.4 mph(110 km/h), but only with the acceleratorpedal released. During the shift the

indicator lamp will flash.

Shifting Between 2H and 4L

Note: Shift to 4L will deactivate EngineTraction Control and Trailer Stability Control but Hill Descent Control, Hill Start Assist and Brake Traction Control remain active.

Note: Shift to 2H will reactivate all the stability control (ESP) functions.

1. Stop the vehicle when it is safe to doso.

2. Fully depress the clutch pedal (manualtransmission).

3. Move the transmission selector leverto position N (automatic transmission).

4. Turn the transfer shift switch from 2Hto 4L or 4L to 2H.

During the shift the indicator lamp willflash. If it continues to flash, check meeting

the above conditions.

Shifting Between 4H and 4L

Note: Shift to 4L will deactivate EngineTraction Control and Trailer Stability Control but Hill Descent Control, Hill Start Assist and Brake Traction Control remain active.

1. Stop the vehicle when it is safe to doso.

2. Fully depress the clutch pedal (manual

transmission).3. Move the transmission selector lever

to position N (automatic transmission).

4. Turn the transfer shift switch from 4Hto 4L or 4L to 4H.

During the shift the indicator lamp willflash. If it continues to flash, check meetingthe above conditions.

Driving in Special Conditions WithFour-Wheel Drive

Four-wheel drive vehicles are suitable for

driving on sand, snow, mud and roughroads and have operating characteristicsthat are somewhat different fromconventional vehicles, both on and off thefreeway.

When driving at slow speeds off road underhigh load conditions, use a low gear whenpossible. Low gear operation will maximizethe engine and transmission coolingcapability.

Basic Operating Principles

• Drive slower in strong crosswinds whichcan affect the normal steeringcharacteristics of your vehicle.

• When driving your vehicle on surfacesmade slippery by loose sand, water,gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.

If Your Vehicle leaves the Road

If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your

vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.When your vehicle speed has been reducedease your vehicle back onto the road. Donot turn the steering wheel sharply whilereturning your vehicle to the road.

It may be safer to stay on the shoulder ofthe road and slow down gradually beforereturning to the road. You may lose controlif you do not slow down or if you turn thesteering wheel too sharply or abruptly.

It may be less risky to strike small objects,such as freeway reflectors, with minordamage to your vehicle rather thanattempt a sudden return to the road whichcould cause your vehicle to slide sidewaysout of control or roll over. Remember, yoursafety and the safety of others should beyour primary concern.

98

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Four-Wheel Drive

Page 101: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 101/266

Emergency Maneuvers

In an unavoidable emergency situationwhere a sudden sharp turn must be made,

remember to avoid over-driving yourvehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only asrapidly and as far as required to avoid theemergency). Excessive steering can resultin loss of vehicle control. Apply smoothpressure to the accelerator pedal or brakepedal when changes in vehicle speed arerequired. Avoid abrupt steering,acceleration and braking. This could resultin an increased risk of vehicle roll over, lossof vehicle control and personal injury. Use

all available road surface to bring yourvehicle to a safe direction of travel.

In the event of an emergency stop, avoidskidding the tires and do not attempt anysharp steering wheel movements.

If your vehicle goes from one type ofsurface to another (i.e. from concrete togravel) there will be a change in the wayyour vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e.steering, acceleration or braking).

Sand

When driving over sand, try to keep all fourwheels on the most solid area of the trail.Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shiftto a lower gear and drive steadily throughthe terrain. Apply the accelerator slowlyand avoid excessive wheel slip.

Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand foran extended period of time. This will causethe system to overheat.

To resume operation, switch the ignitionoff and allow the system to cool down fora minimum of 15 minutes.

When driving at slow speeds in deep sandunder high outside temperatures, use a lowgear when possible. Low gear operationwill maximize the engine and transmissioncooling capability.

Avoid driving at excessive speeds, thiscauses vehicle momentum to work againstyou and your vehicle could become stuckto the point that assistance may be

required from another vehicle. Remember,you may be able to back out the way youcame if you proceed with caution.

Mud and Water

 Mud 

Be cautious of sudden changes in vehiclespeed or direction when you are driving inmud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles canlose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle

does slide, steer in the direction of the slideuntil you regain control of your vehicle.

After driving through mud, clean off residuestuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.Excess mud stuck on tires and rotatingdriveshafts can cause an imbalance thatcould damage drive components.

Water 

If you must drive through high water, drive

slowly. Traction or brake capability maybe limited.

When driving through water, determine thedepth and avoid water higher than thebottom of the wheel rims. If the ignitionsystem gets wet, your vehicle may stall.

Once through water, always try the brakes.Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle aseffectively as dry brakes. Drying can beimproved by applying light pressure to thebrake pedal while moving slowly.

Note: Driving through deep water may damage the transmission. If the front or rear  axle is submerged in water, the axlelubricant and power transfer unit lubricant should be checked and changed if  necessary.

99

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Four-Wheel Drive

Page 102: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 102/266

Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain

Although natural obstacles may make itnecessary to travel diagonally up or down

a hill or steep incline, you should alwaystry to drive straight up or straight down.

Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and possible vehicle roll over.Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand the route you will use. Do notdrive over the crest of a hill without seeingwhat conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer.

When climbing a steep slope or hill, startin a lower gear rather than downshifting toa lower gear from a higher gear once theascent has started. This reduces strain onthe engine and the possibility of stalling.

If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turnaround because this could cause vehicleroll over. It is better to reverse back to asafe location.

Apply just enough power to the wheels to

climb the hill. Too much power will causethe tires to slip, spin or lose traction,resulting in loss of vehicle control.

Descend a hill in the same gear you woulduse to climb up the hill to avoid excessivebrake application and brake overheating.Do not descend in neutral. Disengage

overdrive or move the transmissionselector lever to a lower gear. Whendescending a steep hill, avoid sudden hardbraking as you could lose control. The frontwheels have to be turning in order to steeryour vehicle.

Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, thereforeapply the brakes steadily. Do not pump thebrake pedal.

Driving on Snow and Ice

WARNING

If you are driving in slipperyconditions that require tire chains orcables, then it is critical that you drive

cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow forlonger stopping distances and avoidaggressive steering to reduce the chancesof a loss of vehicle control which can leadto serious injury or death. If the rear end ofyour vehicle slides while cornering, steer in

the direction of the slide until you regaincontrol of your vehicle.

Note: Excessive tire slippage can causetransmission damage.

Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantagesover two-wheel drive vehicles in snow andice but can skid like any other vehicle.Should you start to slide while driving onsnowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel

in the direction of the slide until you regaincontrol.

Avoid sudden applications of power andquick changes of direction on snow andice. Apply the accelerator slowly andsteadily when starting from a full stop.

100

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Four-Wheel Drive

Page 103: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 103/266

Avoid sudden braking. Although afour-wheel drive vehicle may acceleratebetter than a two-wheel drive vehicle insnow and ice, it will not stop any faster as

braking occurs at all four wheels. Do notbecome overconfident as to roadconditions.

Make sure you allow sufficient distancebetween you and other vehicles forstopping. Drive slower than usual andconsider using one of the lower gears. Inemergency stopping situations, apply thebrake steadily. As your vehicle has a fourwheel anti-lock brake system, do not pumpthe brake pedal.  See Hints on DrivingWith Anti-Lock Brakes (page 103).

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud orSnow

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,it may be rocked out by shifting betweenforward and reverse gears, stoppingbetween shifts in a steady pattern. Presslightly on the accelerator in each gear.

Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine

is not at normal operating temperature,damage to the transmission may occur.

Note: Do not rock your vehicle for morethan a minute, damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat.

Maintenance and Modifications

The suspension and steering systems onyour vehicle have been designed and

tested to provide predictable performancewhether loaded or empty. For this reason,we strongly recommend that you do notmake modifications such as adding orremoving parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizerbars) or by using replacement parts notequivalent to the original factoryequipment.

We recommend that you use caution whenyour vehicle has either a high load or device(i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Anymodifications to your vehicle that raise the

center of gravity may cause your vehicleto roll over when there is a loss of vehiclecontrol.

Failure to maintain your vehicle correctlymay void the warranty, increase your repaircost, reduce vehicle performance andoperational capabilities and adverselyaffect you and your passenger's safety. Werecommend you frequently inspect yourvehicle's chassis components when yourvehicle is subject to off road usage.

101

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Four-Wheel Drive

Page 104: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 104/266

LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL

This axle provides added traction onslippery surfaces, particularly when onewheel is on a poor traction surface. Undernormal conditions, the limited slip axlefunctions like a standard rear axle. The axlemay exhibit a slight noise or vibration intight turns with low vehicle speed. This isnormal behavior and indicates the axle isworking.

ELECTRONIC LOCKINGDIFFERENTIAL

WARNING

Do not operate the system on sealedroads. Doing so may lead toexcessive tire noise and wear. Use

the system only in consistently slippery orloose surface.

The system locks the left and right portionsof the rear axle together to form a solid

driving axle, resulting in increased rearwheel traction in certain conditions.

Press the Electronic Locking Differential(ELD) button to activate the system. Foritem location: See Instrument PanelOverview (page 15).

The rear axle will lock and unlock when theinternal gears are aligned and with notorque load on the differential. To aidalignment, drive the vehicle in a straight

line with the accelerator pedal released.Alternatively, drive slowly forward andbackward while moving the steering wheelfrom side to side to allow the internaldifferential gears to align.

The system will:

• Automatically disengage when a speedof 24.9 mph (40 km/h) is exceeded.

• Automatically re-engage when the

speed drops below 18.6 mph(30 km/h).

• Automatically disengage when theignition is turned off.

Note: The system activates when thevehicle speed is less than 18.6 mph(30 km/h) and accelerator pedal released.

Note: The system can be used in any transmission drive range (2H, 4H or 4L).

If the system is selected when driving

above 24.9 mph (40 km/h), the request isstored and will be engaged when thevehicle speed reduces to 18.6 mph(30 km/h). The ELD indicator lamp willflash until either the vehicle speed reducesand the differential lock is engaged or thedriver deselects the ELD button.

Note: When the system is engaged, theElectronic Stability Program (ESP) functions such as Stability Control, Traction Control,Hill Descent Control, Emergency stop signal,

Hill Start Assist and Trailer stability controlwill be deactivated, the ESP off indicator illuminates, and the HDC on indicator turnsoff.

Note: When the ABS is operating, the system will be disengaged.

102

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Rear Axle

Page 105: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 105/266

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Disc brakes

Wet brake discs result in reduced brakingefficiency. Dab the brake pedal whendriving from a car wash to remove the filmof water.

ABS

WARNING

The ABS does not relieve you of yourresponsibility to drive with due careand attention.

The ABS helps you to maintain full steeringand directional stability when you brakeheavily in an emergency, by preventing theroad wheels from locking.

Brake override

In the event that the accelerator pedalbecomes stuck or entrapped, applyingsteady and firm pressure to the brake

pedal will both slow the vehicle and reduceengine power.

If you experience this condition:

1. Apply the brakes and bring your vehicleto a safe stop.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Select park (automatic transmissiononly).

4. Apply the parking brake.

Inspect the accelerator pedal for anyinterferences. If none are found and thecondition persists, have your vehicle towedto a dealer.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITHANTI-LOCK BRAKES

Note: When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travelfurther. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise from the system. This is normal.

The anti-lock braking system will noteliminate the risks when:

• you drive too closely to the vehicle infront of you

• your vehicle is hydroplaning

• you take corners too fast• the road surface is poor.

PARKING BRAKE

WARNING

Always set the parking brake fullyand leave your vehicle with thetransmission selector lever in

position P.

Note: Do not press the release button while pulling the lever up.

To apply the parking brake:

1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly.

2. Pull the parking brake lever up to itsfullest extent.

Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and facing uphill, move the transmission selector 

lever to position P and turn the steeringwheel away from the curb.

Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and facing downhill, move the transmission selector lever to P and turn the steeringwheel toward the curb.

To release the parking brake:

1. Press the brake pedal firmly.

2. Pull the lever up slightly.

103

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Brakes

Page 106: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 106/266

Page 107: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 107/266

• Apply the parking brake.

• Open any door.

• Drive off uphill without re-applying the

brake.• Wait for one to two seconds after you

remove your foot from the brake pedal.

• If the system is active in a forward gear,select reverse gear.

• If the system is active in neutral,release the clutch pedal (Manualtransmission).

• If the system is active in reverse gear,select neutral.

Switching the System On and Off

Note: You can only switch the system on and off if your vehicle has a manualtransmission.

Note: The system will remain on or off depending on how it was last set.

Your vehicle comes with this featurealready enabled. If required, you can switchthis feature off using the information

display.  See General Information (page59).

105

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Brakes

Page 108: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 108/266

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The traction control system helps avoiddrive wheel spin and loss of traction.

If your vehicle begins to slide, the systemapplies the brakes to individual wheelsand, when needed, reduces engine powerat the same time. If the wheels spin whenaccelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,the system reduces engine power in orderto increase traction.

USING TRACTION CONTROL

Traction control forms part of the stabilitycontrol system.

Note: The system automatically turns onevery time you switch the ignition on.

Note: Switching off the stability control willturn off the system.

In certain situations (e.g. stuck in snow ormud), turning the system off may bebeneficial as this allows the wheels to spinwith full engine power.

Traction control is an enhanced feature ofstability control system and automaticallydetects the wheel spin when youaccelerate. If this situation occurs, thesystem applies your vehicle brakes atindividual wheels and if necessary, reducesengine power.

Note: Shift to 4L will deactivate enginetraction control but brake traction control remain active.

Note: Switching on the electronic lockingdifferential will turn off the system.

Note: To switch off the traction control as required,  See Stability Control (page 107).

106

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Traction Control

Page 109: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 109/266

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Electronic Stability Program

WARNING

The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention. Failure to do so

could result in loss of vehicle control,personal injury or death.

Without ESPA

With ESPB

The system supports stability when yourvehicle starts to slide away from yourintended path. The system performs thisby braking individual wheels and reducingengine torque as required.

The system also provides an enhancedtraction control function by reducingengine torque if the wheels spin when youaccelerate. This improves your ability topull away on slippery roads or loosesurfaces, and improves comfort by limitingwheel spin in hairpin bends.

Stability Control Warning Lamp

While driving, it flashes when the systemis operating.  See Warning Lamps and

Indicators (page 53).

USING STABILITY CONTROL

Note: The system will be switched on automatically every time you switch theignition on.

Note: When the system is deactivated withthe transfer switch in 2H position, the ESPoff indicator will flash twice to indicate that

the system is completely turned off and  remains illuminated. Press the switch againto enable the system. For item location: See

 At a Glance (page 12).

Note: ESP is switched off when the transfer  switch is in 4L position or the electroniclocking differential is operating.

2-wheel drive vehicles

Press and hold the switch for one secondto deactivate engine traction control, trailerstability control and brake traction control.Hill start assist remains active.

4-wheel drive vehicles

Note: All the stability control (ESP)functions are reactivated when 2H  positionis selected.

Transfer shift switch in 4H position:

• Press and hold the switch for one

second to deactivate engine tractioncontrol and trailer stability control. Hilldescent control, hill start assist andbrake traction control remain active.

Transfer shift switch in 4H or 4L position:

107

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Stability Control

Page 110: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 110/266

• Press and hold the switch for fiveseconds to deactivate engine tractioncontrol, trailer stability control andbrake traction control. Hill descent

control and hill start assist remainactive.

Transfer shift switch in 2H position:

• Press and hold the switch for onesecond to deactivate engine tractioncontrol, brake traction control andstability control including trailerstability control. Hill descent controland hill start assist remain active.

108

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Stability Control

Page 111: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 111/266

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNING

Before driving off-road it isabsolutely essential thatin-experienced drivers become fully

familiar with the vehicle's controls. Inparticular, Sport mode and Hill DescentControl (HDC).

Hill descent control (HDC) operates inconjunction with stability control (ESP) toprovide greater control when off-road,particularly when descending steep slopes.

HDC operation is fully automatic whenengaged.

Engine braking controls the speed of thedescent during an off-road hill descent. Ifengine braking alone is insufficient tocontrol the vehicle's speed, HDC will slowthe vehicle using the braking system.

Note: Use HDC only in first or reverse gear in manual transmission vehicles.

Note: Use HDC only in D , R or Sport mode1 in automatic transmission vehicles. Whenin D, the vehicle will select the most appropriate gear.

USING HILL DESCENTCONTROL

Note: HDC deactivates when the electroniclocking differential is operating.

Selecting HDCSelect HDC at speeds less than 37.3 mph(60 km/h). To select HDC, press the hilldescent control switch. For item location:See Instrument Panel Overview (page15).

Note: HDC will be active at speeds lessthan 21.7 mph (35 km/h) and deactivated  above 24.9 mph (40 km/h) but will not turnoff until vehicle exceeds 37.3 mph

(60 km/h).

Note: HDC will turn off when you switchthe ignition off.

The HDC switch will illuminatecontinuously to indicate thatHDC is fully active.

HDC will temporarily deactivate during thefollowing conditions:

• The brake is hot. Operation resumes

once the brakes cool down.

• Stability control indicator on warninglamp is illuminated and operating.

• Electronic locking differential isoperating.

HDC Operation

Cruise control switches on the steering

wheel allows you to control your speed ofdescent. SET + increases the speed andSET - decreases the speed.

109

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Terrain Response

Page 112: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 112/266

Changing the Set Speed

• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Releasethe control when you reach the desired

speed.• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The

set speed will change in approximately0.6 mph (1 km/h) increments.

Pressing the accelerator pedal or brakepedal will increase or decrease the speedrespectively.

Note: Each gear has a pre-determined  minimum speed.

Note: Descent speed will only increase on

 a slope steep enough to provide additional momentum. Therefore, use of the SET+ switch on a gentle slope may not increasethe speed.

Note: Brake overrides the HDC if the brake pedal is pressed and the system resumeson the release of the brake pedal.

Note: HDC assistance will fade out gradually if you switch the system off. Thisis to prevent the loss of control if you press

the HDC switch unintentionally. If assistanceis still required, you can switch back the HDC on. The control will resume at a speed thevehicle is travelling when the pedal is released.

Note: You may hear a noise from the system. This is normal.

Note: When HDC is operating, ESP onwarning lamp will flash.

HDC operates only if the vehicle speed is

within the specified range even if thesystem is on permanently during off-roaddriving.

110

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Terrain Response

Page 113: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 113/266

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGS

The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

If your vehicles has a non-Fordapproved trailer tow module thesystem may not correctly detect

objects.

The sensors may not detect objectsin heavy rain or other conditions thatcause disruptive reflections.

The sensors may not detect objectswith surfaces that absorb ultrasonicwaves.

The system does not detect objectsthat are moving away from yourvehicle. They will only be detected

shortly after they start to move towardyour vehicle.

Take particular care when reversingwith a tow ball arm or a rear fitted

accessory. For example, a bicyclecarrier. The rear parking aid will onlyindicate the approximate distance fromthe rear bumper to an object.

If you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray thesensors briefly from a distance not

less than eight inches (20 centimeters).

Note: If your vehicle has a tow ball arm, the system is turned off automatically when

trailer lamps (or lighting boards) areconnected to the 13-pin socket through aFord approved trailer tow module.

Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt, iceor snow. Do not clean with sharp objects.

Note: The system may emit false alerts if it detects a signal using the same frequency  as the sensors or if your vehicle is fully loaded.

Note: The outer sensors may detect the side walls of a garage. If the distance between the outer sensors and the side wall remains constant for three seconds, the

 alert will turn off. As you continue the inner  sensors will detect objects directly behind  your vehicle.

PARKING AID

WARNING

The parking aid does not relieve youof your responsibility to drive withdue care and attention.

The parking aid is automatically activatedwhen you select reverse gear with theignition switched on.

Note: It will chime once to indicate that the parking aid is activated.

Note: The indicator lamps will be displayed in the multi-function display. For itemlocation:  See Instrument Panel Overview (page 15). .

111

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Parking Aids

Page 114: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 114/266

You will hear an intermittent tone at adistance of approximately 180 centimeters(71 inches) between the obstacle and rearbumper and approximately 50 centimeters

(20 inches) to the side. Decreasing thedistance accelerates the intermittent tone.

Distance Indicator.A

As the distance decreases the indicatormoves towards the vehicle.

A continuous tone will start at a distanceof less than 40 centimeters (15 inches) tothe rear bumper.

Malfunction indicator.A

Note: If a malfunction is indicated the

 system will be disabled and a unique tonewill be heard. Have the system checked by  a properly trained technician.

112

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Parking Aids

Page 115: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 115/266

A trailer symbol indicates there is a trailerattached and the system is disabled.

REAR VIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNINGS

The operation of the camera mayvary depending on the ambienttemperature, vehicle and road

conditions.

The distances shown in the displaymay differ from the actual distance.

Do not place objects in front of thecamera.

The camera is located on the tailgatebelow the badge.

Switching the Rear View Camera

On

WARNING

The camera may not detect objectsthat are close to your vehicle.

Switch the ignition and the audio unit on.

Move the transmission selector lever toreverse.

The image is displayed on the rear viewmirror screen.

The camera may not operate correctly inthe following conditions:

• Dark areas.

• Intense light.

• If the ambient temperature increasesor decreases rapidly.

• If the camera is wet, for example in rainor high humidity.

• If the camera's view is obstructed, forexample by mud.

Using the Display 

WARNINGS

Obstacles above the camera positionwill not be shown. Inspect the areabehind your vehicle if necessary.

113

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Parking Aids

Page 116: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 116/266

WARNINGS

Marks are for general guidance only,and are calculated for vehicles in

maximum load conditions on aneven road surface.

The lines show the distance from the outeredge of the front tire plus two inches (51millimeters) and the rear bumper.

Exterior mirror clearance - 4inches (0.1 meter)

A

Red - up to 12 inches (0.3 meter)B

Amber - 39 inches (1 meter)C

114

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Parking Aids

Page 117: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 117/266

Green - 79 inches (2 meter)D

Black - center line of theprojected vehicle path

E

Note: When reversing with a trailer, the lineson the screen are not shown. The camerawill show your vehicle direction and not thetrailer.

Switching the Rear View CameraOff

Note: Move the transmission selector lever from reverse gear. The display will switchoff after a short period.

Note: The system will automatically switchoff once your vehicle speed has reached  approximately 9.3 mph (15 km/h).

115

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Parking Aids

Page 118: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 118/266

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNING

The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

Cruise control allows you to control yourspeed using the switches on the steeringwheel. You can use cruise control whenyou exceed approximately 20 mph (30km/h).

USING CRUISE CONTROL

WARNINGS

Do not use cruise control in heavytraffic, on winding roads or when theroad surface is slippery. This could

result in loss of vehicle control, seriousinjury or death.

When you are going downhill, yourspeed may increase above the setspeed. The system will not apply the

brakes. Change down a gear to assist thesystem in maintaining the set speed.Failure to do so could result in loss ofvehicle control, serious injury or death.

Note: Cruise control will disengage if your vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph(16 km/h) below your set speed whiledriving uphill.

The cruise controls are located on thesteering wheel.

Switching Cruise Control On

Press and release ON.

The indicator will display in theinstrument cluster.

Setting a Speed

1. Accelerate to the desired speed.

2. Press and release SET+.

3. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

Changing the Set Speed

• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Releasethe control when you reach the desiredspeed.

• Press and release SET+ or SET-. Theset speed will change in approximately1 mph (2 km/h) increments.

• Press the accelerator or brake pedaluntil you reach the desired speed. Pressand release SET+.

Canceling the Set Speed

Press and release CAN, or tap the brakepedal. The set speed will not be erased.

116

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Cruise Control

Page 119: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 119/266

Resuming the Set Speed

Press and release RES.

Switching Cruise Control OffNote: You will erase the set speed if you switch the system off.

Press and release OFF or switch theignition off.

117

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Cruise Control

Page 120: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 120/266

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGS

Use load securing straps to anapproved standard, e.g. DIN.

Make sure that you secure all looseitems properly.

Place luggage and other loads as lowand as far forward as possible withinthe luggage or loadspace.

Do not drive with the liftgate or reardoor open. Exhaust fumes may enteryour vehicle.

Do not exceed the maximum frontand rear axle loads for your vehicle.See Vehicle Identification Plate

(page 190).

Do not exceed the maximum grossvehicle weight.  See VehicleIdentification Plate (page 190).

Note: When loading long objects in to your vehicle, for example pipes, timber or furniture be careful not to damage theinterior trim.

LUGGAGE COVERS

WARNINGS

Do not move your vehicle withpeople or animals in the loadspace.

Do not use the roller shutter pull

strap to secure loads.Do not sit, stand or place anythingon the roller shutter.

WARNINGS

To service the roller shutter, see anauthorized dealer.

Note: You must secure the loads carried inthe loadspace.

Note: Use the pull strap to close the roller  shutter.

Note: Make sure that the roller shutter isfree of any obstruction before you open or close it. For example; snow or ice.

Note: Water and dust may enter theloadspace with the roller shutter closed.

Operation

The roller shutter has four lockingpositions:

1. Fully closed.

2. 1/3 open.

3. 2/3 open.

4. Fully open.

Note:The locking mechanism does not lock

 automatically as it passes each locking position.

Locking and lunlocking intopositions

Note: You will hear a click as the roller  shutter passes each locking position.

Note: Use the pull strap to control the roller  shutter movement while opening.

Lock the roller shutter at the requiredlocking position by pulling the pull strap tothe left.

118

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Load Carrying

Page 121: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 121/266

Unlock the roller shutter by pulling the pullstrap to the right or by pressing the lockbuttons.

119

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Load Carrying

Page 122: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 122/266

ROOF RACKS AND LOADCARRIERS

WARNINGS

If you use a roof rack, the fuelconsumption of your vehicle will behigher and you may experience

different driving characteristics.

Read and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions when you are fitting a

roof rack.

WARNINGS

Do not exceed the maximumpermissible roof rail load of 176.37 lb(80 kg), including the roof rack.

Check the security of the roof rack load:

• Before starting.

• After driving 31.1 mi (50 km).

• At 621.4 mi (1,000 km) intervals.

120

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Load Carrying

Page 123: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 123/266

Roof RailA

Sports barB

Box railC

Note:Do not sit or stand on items B or C.

Note: Do not use item C to secure loads.

Note: To reduce fuel consumption, roof rails should be removed when not in use.

LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES

Tie Down Points

WARNINGS

Use the tie down points only forrestraining the loads within theloadspace. Using tie down points for

any other purpose may lead to seriousinjury or vehicle damage. Do not use thetie down points for towing.

Each tie down point has a maximumload rating. Exceeding this may leadto serious injury and vehicle damage.

WARNINGSAlways inspect the tie down pointsbefore use.

Note: The number of tie down points may vary depending on your vehicle model.

121

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Load Carrying

Page 124: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 124/266

Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

WARNING

Do not exceed the maximum loadper tie down point stamped on it.

CleatA

BezelB

SpringC

PinD

Do not use the tie down points under thefollowing conditions:

• Any sign of wear or damage.

• Rail channels supporting the tie downpoints show any sign of wear, damageor distortion.

122

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Load Carrying

Page 125: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 125/266

• Locking bezel is damaged or broken orwill not lock into place.

• Not seated correctly within the support

rail.Fitting the Tie Down Points

WARNING

Bezel must be fully engage into therail to secure the tie down point forsafe use. The word ‘Not Locked’ will

be visible in the incorrectly installed tiedowns.

1. Engage the base of the tie down pointinto the rail channel while holding thecleat vertically.

2. Slide along the rail until the pin on thebase of the tie down engages in adesired hole on the rail.

3. Push the tie down in and rotate aquarter turn clockwise until the tiedown cleat is horizontal and the lockingbezel “snaps” into place.

Removing the Tie Down Points

1. Grasp the locking bezel between thethumb and fingers using the fingerrecess.

2. Pull the bezel away from the rail untilthe base of the tie down point is fully

disengaged from the rail channel.3. Turn the tie down point a quarter turn

anticlockwise until it snaps out of therail.

Load Rest

WARNINGS

A loaded load rest alters the vehicle'scenter of gravity and aerodynamics.Take care when cornering, driving in

crosswinds and at high speeds.

Do not exceed the permissible grossweight.  See Vehicle IdentificationPlate (page 190).

123

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Load Carrying

Page 126: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 126/266

Note: Secure luggage or cargo placed onthe load rest with the load rest stoppers.

TAILGATEWARNINGS

Do not exceed the maximumpermissible tailgate load of 485 lb(220 kg).

Do not lower the tailgate completelyin the vehicles with a tow ball or abumper.

Make sure that you keep a firm grip

of the tailgate to prevent it fromdropping down.

Lowering the Tailgate

1. Raise the tailgate slightly.

2. Pull the support cable rearwards.

3. Release the support cable fromtailgate.

4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to pull out thesupport cable on the other side.

Note: Lower the tailgate for better ingressor egress of the loads.

124

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Load Carrying

Page 127: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 127/266

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNINGS

Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h).

Do not exceed the maximumpermissible gross train weight stated.See Recommended Towing

Weights (page 126).

Do not exceed the maximumpermissible nose weight, e.g. verticalweight on the tow ball.  See

Recommended Towing Weights (page

126).Do not exceed the maximumpermissible axle load stated on yourvehicle identification plate.  See

Vehicle Identification Plate (page 190).

The anti-lock braking system doesnot control the overrun brake on thetrailer.

Note: Vehicles equipped with electronic

 stability program (ESP) have trailer stability control included.

When towing a trailer:

• Obey country specific regulations fortowing a trailer.

• Do not exceed 62.1 mph (100 km/h)even if a country allows higher speedsunder certain conditions.

• Place loads as low as possible andcentral to the axle of your trailer. For

best stability of the trailer in an unladenvehicle, place the load in the trailertowards the nose within the maximumnose load as this gives the beststability.  See Recommended TowingWeights (page 126).

• Reduce the stipulated maximumpermitted gross train weight by 10%for every additional 3,280.84 ft(1,000 m) in high altitude regions

above 3,280.84 ft (1,000 m).

• Use a low gear when descending asteep downhill gradient.

The stability of your vehicle to trailercombination is very much dependent onthe quality of the trailer.

Trailer Tow Module

WARNINGS

Do not connect the trailer patchharness to the vehicle when thetrailer is not connected.

Make sure that the indicator andbrake lamps do not flicker withengine running while using a trailer

with low power LED lamps.

Vehicles with factory fitted tow bar includea trailer plug control module for trailerlighting. Along with trailer plug

functionality, it also protects the vehicle’sprimary electrical circuits and some trailerelectrical failures.

You can purchase a trailer tow kit from anauthorized dealer for the vehicles withoutfactory fitted tow bar. This enables the towbar installation.

The kit includes:

• Trailer plug

•Wiring and hardware components

• Trailer plug control module

Note: Have the trailer tow electrical kitconfigured by an authorized dealer.

Connect a trailer patch harness betweenthe trailer and the vehicle to overcomeflickering and correct operation of the rearparking aid.

125

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Towing

Page 128: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 128/266

Note: The trailer patch harness is availablewith the Ford authorized dealer.

TRAILER SWAY CONTROLNote: The system automatically turns onevery time you switch the ignition on.

Note: Switching off the stability control willturn off the system.

Note: This feature does not prevent trailer  sway, but reduces it once it begins.

Note: This feature cannot stop all trailersfrom swaying.

Trailer sway control is an enhanced featureof stability control system andautomatically detects when an attachedtrailer starts to sway. This feature applies

your vehicle brakes at individual wheelsand if necessary, reduces engine power. Ifthe trailer begins to sway, slow your vehicledown, pull safely to the side of the roadand check for correct load distribution.See Towing a Trailer (page 125).

Note: Shift to 4L will deactivate trailer sway control.

Note: Switching on the electronic lockingdifferential will turn off the system.

Note: To switch off the trailer sway control as required,  See Stability Control (page107).

RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS

Towing Capacities - For Base Series

Max. GrossTrain Weight

With TrailerBrake

Without TrailerBrake

Transmis-sion

DriveVariant

9,755 lb(4,425 kg)

3,307 lb(1,500 kg)

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4X22.5L Petrol

9,976 lb(4,525 kg)

3,307 lb(1,500 kg)

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4x2*

9,094 lb(4,125 kg)

2,425 lb(1,100 kg)

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4x4

9,755 lb(4,425 kg)

3,307 lb(1,500 kg)

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4X22.2L Diesel88kW

9,976 lb(4,525 kg)3,307 lb(1,500 kg)1,653 lb(750 kg)Manual4x4

9,976 lb(4,525 kg)

3,307 lb(1,500 kg)

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4x2* and

4x4

2.2L Diesel92kW

126

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Towing

Page 129: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 129/266

Max. GrossTrain Weight

With TrailerBrake

Without TrailerBrake

Transmis-sion

DriveVariant

9,755 lb(4,425 kg)

3,307 lb(1,500 kg)

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4x22.2L Diesel110kW

10,362 lb(4,700 kg)

3,307 lb(1,500 kg)

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4x2* and

4x4

10,362 lb(4,700 kg)

3,307 lb(1,500 kg)

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4x2* and

4x4

3.2L Diesel

Towing capacities- For all other series

Max. GrossTrain Weight

With TrailerBrake

Without TrailerBrake

Transmis-sion

DriveVariant

11,299 lb(5,125 kg)

4,850 lb(2,200 kg)

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4X22.5L Petrol

10,803 lb(4,900 kg)

3,748 lb(1,700 kg)

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4x2*

9,480 lb(4,300 kg)

2,425 lb(1,100 kg)

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4x4

11,299 lb(5,125 kg)4,850 lb(2,200 kg)1,653 lb(750 kg)Manual4X22.2L Diesel88kW &92kW

10,582 lb(4,800 kg)

3,527 lb(1,600 kg)

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4x2* and

4x4

11,960 lb(5,425 kg)

5,512 lb(2,500 kg)

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4x22.2L Diesel110kW

11,023 lb(5,000 kg)

3,968 lb(1,800 kg)

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4x2*

Drive ratio3.31

13,118 lb

(5,950 kg)1

7,385 lb

(3,350 kg)1

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4x2* and

4x413,228 lb

(6,000 kg)2

7,716 lb

(3,500 kg)2

Drive ratio3.55

13,118 lb

(5,950 kg)1

7,385 lb

(3,350 kg)1

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Auto4x2* and

4x4

127

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Towing

Page 130: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 130/266

Max. GrossTrain Weight

With TrailerBrake

Without TrailerBrake

Transmis-sion

DriveVariant

13,228 lb

(6,000 kg)2

7,716 lb

(3,500 kg)2

11,023 lb(5,000 kg)

3,968 lb(1,800 kg)

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4x2* and

4x4

3.2L Diesel

Drive ratio3.31

13,118 lb

(5,950 kg)1

7,385 lb

(3,350 kg)1

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Manual4x2* and

4x413,228 lb

(6,000 kg)2

7,716 lb

(3,500 kg)2

Drive ratio

3.55

13,118 lb

(5,950 kg)1

7,385 lb

(3,350 kg)1

1,653 lb(750 kg)

Auto4x2* and

4x413,228 lb

(6,000 kg)2

7,716 lb

(3,500 kg)2

*Vehicles with increased ride height

1 European vehicles built before 11th March 2013 and all non-European vehicles.

2 European vehicles built on or after 11th March 2013.

Note: See an authorized dealer to confirm your vehicle build date.

Trailer Nose Weight

WARNING

Do not exceed the maximum permissible nose weight, e.g. vertical weight on thetow ball. This is important for vehicle and trailer stability.

Maximum Nose WeightMinimum Nose WeightDrive

364 lb (165 kg)6% of the towed weight4x2

496 lb (225 kg)4x2* and 4x4

*Vehicles with increased ride height

128

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Towing

Page 131: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 131/266

TOW BALL

WARNINGS

Never leave the detached tow ballarm unsecured inside the vehicle.This would increase the risk of injury

in an accident.

When not in use, always transportthe tow ball arm securely fastenedin the luggage compartment.

Take special care when fitting thetow ball arm as the safety of thevehicle and the trailer depends on

this.Do not modify the trailer coupling.

Do not disassemble or repair the towball arm.

A trailer socket and the tow ball arm seatare provided underneath the rear bumper.Turn the trailer socket down through 90degrees until it engages in the correct

position.

4x2

Inserting the tow ball arm

1. Insert the tow ball arm in to the seat.

WARNING

Make sure that the tow ball arm isfully engaged in the seat.

Driving with a trailer

WARNING

If any of the following conditionscannot be met, do not use the towbar and have it inspected by properly

trained technicians.

Before starting your journey, make surethat:

• The tow ball is correctly locked.

• The tow ball arm is fully engaged in itsseat.

129

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Towing

Page 132: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 132/266

Removing the tow ball arm

1. Push the lever towards the center ofthe vehicle.

2. Turn the lever counterclockwise tounlock the tow ball arm.

3. Remove the tow ball arm.

4x2 (vehicles with increased rideheight) and 4x4

Tighten the bolts to 218 ± 42 Nm.

Driving without a trailer

1. Remove the tow ball arm.

2. Install the plug into its seat.

WARNINGS

To avoid risk of injury, never unlockthe tow ball arm with the trailer

attached.Remove the tow ball when drivingwithout a trailer.

Maintenance

Keep the system clean.

Periodically lubricate the tow ballmechanism with resin-free grease or oiland the lock with graphite.

TOWING POINTS

Front towing eyeA

Rear towing eyeB

Note: The second front towing point isoptional.

Note: The rear towing point is optional.

130

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Towing

Page 133: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 133/266

TOWING THE VEHICLE ONFOUR WHEELS

All VehiclesWARNINGS

Switch the ignition on when towingthe vehicle.

The brake and steering assistancewill not operate unless the engine isrunning. Press the brake pedal harder

and allow for increased stopping distancesand heavier steering.

Too much tension in the tow ropecould cause damage to your vehicleor the vehicle that is towing.

Do not use a rigid tow bar on thefront towing eye.

2WD: When towing your vehicle youmust select neutral.

4WD: Do not tow the vehicle with allwheels on the ground while in 4WDmode. Tow your vehicle with all

wheels off the ground or all wheels on theground while the vehicle is in 2WD modein an event of a breakdown or mechanicalfailure of the transmission.

Drive off slowly and smoothly withoutjerking the vehicle you are towing.

Vehicles With AutomaticTransmission

WARNINGSIf a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) anda distance of 12.4 mi (20 km) is to beexceeded the drive wheels must be

lifted clear of the ground.

WARNINGS

It is recommended not to tow withthe drive wheels on the ground.

However, if it is required to move yourvehicle from a dangerous location, do nottow your vehicle faster than 12 mph(20 km/h) or further than 12.4 mi (20 km).

Do not tow your vehicle backward.

In the event of a mechanical failureof the transmission the drive wheelsmust be lifted clear of the ground.

Do not tow your vehicle if the

ambient temperature is below 32°F(0°C).

131

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Towing

Page 134: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 134/266

BREAKING-IN

Tires

WARNING

New tires need to be run-in forapproximately 300 miles (500kilometers). During this time, you

may experience different drivingcharacteristics.

Brakes and Clutch

WARNING

Avoid heavy use of the brakes andclutch if possible for the first 100miles (150 kilometers) in town and

for the first 1000 miles (1500 kilometers)on freeways.

Engine

WARNING

Avoid driving too fast during the first

1000 miles (1500 kilometers). Varyyour speed frequently and changeup through the gears early. Do not laborthe engine.

GENERAL DRIVING POINTS

Vehicles with a diesel engine

If the low fuel level warning lamp comeson, refuel as soon as possible. If you

continue driving without refueling, theengine will start to run unevenly. Thisindicates that you are about to run out offuel. Refuel immediately.

COLD WEATHERPRECAUTIONS

The functional operation of somecomponents and systems can be affectedat temperatures below -13°F (-25°C).

REDUCED ENGINEPERFORMANCE

WARNING

Continued operation of theoverheating engine will increase the

temperature further, and cause theengine to shut down completely.

Drive the overheating engine only for a briefamount of time without damage to theengine. The engine will continue to operatewith limited power. The distance you cantravel depends on ambient temperature,vehicle load, and terrain.

If the needle in the engine coolant

temperature gauge moves to the upperlimit position, the engine is overheating.See Gauges (page 53).

If the engine temperature continues to rise,the fuel supply to the engine will reduce.The air conditioning will also turn off andthe engine cooling fan will operate.

When this happens:

immediately

• Stop your vehicle as soon as possible.

• Immediately turn off the engine toprevent severe engine damage.

• Wait for the engine to cool down.

• Check the coolant level.  See EngineCoolant Check (page 159).

• Have the vehicle checked by anauthorized dealer.

132

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Driving Hints

Page 135: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 135/266

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

WARNINGS

Drive through water in an emergencyonly and not as part of normaldriving.

Engine damage can occur if waterenters the air filter.

In an emergency, you can drive your vehiclethrough water to a maximum depth asshown and at a maximum speed of4.3 mph (7 km/h). You must take extra

care when driving through flowing water.23.6220 in (600 mm)

4x2

600mm (23.6 inches)X

4x2 (Vehicles with Increased RideHeight) and 4x4

800mm (31.5 inches)Y

When driving in water, maintain a lowspeed and do not stop your vehicle. Afterdriving through water and as soon as it issafe to do so:

• Depress the brake pedal lightly tocheck that the brakes are functioningcorrectly.

• Check that the horn works.

• Check that your vehicle's lamps arefully operational.

• Check the power assistance of thesteering system.

FLOOR MATS

133

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Driving Hints

Page 136: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 136/266

WARNINGS

Always use floor mats that aredesigned to fit the foot well of your

vehicle, leaving the pedal areaunobstructed, and which can be firmlysecured to retention posts so that theycannot slip out of position and interferewith the pedals or impair safe operation ofyour vehicle in other ways.

Incorrectly fitted floor mats cancause the accelerator pedal tobecome stuck in the open position.

This can cause loss of vehicle control.

Always correctly install the floor

mats to the retention posts so thatthey cannot slip out of position or

obstruct pedal operation.

Do not place unsecured floor matsor any other covering in the foot well.

Do not place additional floor matsor any other covering on top of theoriginal floor mats. This will reduce

the pedal clearance and interfere with thepedal operation.

Do not allow objects to fall orbecome trapped under the pedals ofyour vehicle. This can cause loss of

vehicle control.

Carry out regular inspections to makesure the floor mats are secure.

To install the floor mats, position the floormat eyelet over the retention post andpress down to lock in position.

Remove in reverse order.

134

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Driving Hints

Page 137: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 137/266

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The hazard warning button is located onthe instrument panel. Use it when yourvehicle is creating a safety hazard for othermotorists.

Press the button to turn on the hazardwarning function, and the front and reardirection indicators will flash.

Press the button again to turn them off.

Note: If used when the engine is not running, the battery will lose charge. There may be insufficient power to restart your engine.

Note: Depending on applicable laws and  regulations in the country for which your vehicle was originally built, the hazard warning flashers may flash if you brake heavily.

FIRST AID KITNote: First aid kit is secured in the passenger side storage compartment.

WARNING TRIANGLE

Single cab

A retaining strap behind the passenger seatcan be used to secure a warning triangle.

Fold the seatback forward.1

Stretch cab

Note: The warning triangle can be secured in the tool bin below the rear seats.

135

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Roadside Emergencies

Page 138: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 138/266

Remove the rear seat cushion.1

Remove the cover.2

Double cab

Fold the rear seatback forward.1

JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE

WARNINGS

Do not use fuel lines, engine rockercovers or the intake manifold asgrounding points.

Connect batteries with only the samenominal voltage.

Always use booster cables withinsulated clamps and adequate sizecable.

Never jump start the vehicle at theauxiliary battery.

Note: Do not disconnect the battery from your vehicle’  s electrical system.

136

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Roadside Emergencies

Page 139: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 139/266

To Connect the Booster Cables

Flat battery vehicleA

Booster battery vehicleB

Positive connection cableC

Negative connection cableD

1. Position the vehicles so that they donot touch one another.

2. Switch off the engine and any electricalequipment.

3. Connect the positive (+) terminal ofvehicle B with the positive (+) terminalof vehicle A (cable C).

4. Connect the negative (-) terminal ofvehicle B to the ground connection ofvehicle A (cable D).

WARNINGS

Do not connect directly to thenegative (–) terminal of the flatbattery.

Make sure that the cables are clear

of any moving parts and fuel deliverysystem parts.

To Start the Engine

1. Run the engine of vehicle B at amoderately high speed.

2. Start the engine of vehicle A.

3. Run both vehicles for a minimum ofthree minutes before disconnecting thecables.

WARNING

Do not switch the headlamps onwhen disconnecting the cables. Thepeak voltage could blow the bulbs.

Disconnect the cables in the reverse order.

137

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Roadside Emergencies

Page 140: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 140/266

FUSE BOX LOCATIONS

Left-Hand Drive

Right-Hand Drive

Engine compartment fuse boxA

Passenger compartment fusebox

B

Auxiliary fuse boxC

Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Release the catches and remove the cover.

Passenger Compartment Fuse Box

Fully open the driver's side storagecompartment.

138

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuses

Page 141: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 141/266

Auxiliary Fuse Box

Release the catches and remove the cover.

139

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuses

Page 142: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 142/266

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART

Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Protected ComponentsFuse AmpRating

Fuse

Passenger compartment fuse box supply (Battery)601

Passenger compartment fuse box supply (Battery)602

Engine cooling fan503 (Petrol)

Glow plug control module603 (Diesel)

Anti-lock brake system module404

Power windows (front and rear)305

140

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuses

Page 143: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 143/266

Protected ComponentsFuse AmpRating

Fuse

Four wheel drive (4WD) motor ground256

Not used-7

Not used-8

Power seats209

Power windows (front)2510

Blower motor3011

Four wheel drive (4WD) motor power2512

Starter solenoid2013

Heated rear window2014

Flex-fuel pump1015 (Petrol)

Vaporizer glow plug2015 (Diesel)

Air conditioning clutch1016

Power windows (front)2517

Windscreen wiper motor2518

Windscreen wiper motor ground2519

Cigar lighter2020

Horn1521

Fuel injectors, flex-fuel valve1522

Differential lock solenoid1023

Auxiliary power socket instrument panel, console top2024

Ignition coils, temperature and mass air flow sensor, glowplug module, vacuum control valve (VCV), electronicvacuum regulator valve (EVRV)

1525

Electronic control module (ECM)7.526

Transmission control module (TCM)1027

Heated exhaust gas oxygen, universal heated exhaust gasoxygen-sensor, relay coils

1028

141

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuses

Page 144: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 144/266

Protected ComponentsFuse AmpRating

Fuse

Electronic control module (ECM)1529

Battery monitoring sensor1530

Auxiliary power socket (rear console)2031

Air conditioning pressure switch532

Transmission control module (TCM)1033

Positive temperature coefficient (PTC) heater534

Passenger compartment fuse box supply (Ignition)2035

Anti-lock brake system module536

Headlamp leveling1037

Heated seat2038

Power mirrors1039

Not used-40

Heated mirrors1041

Alarm horn1042

Heated windscreen (right)3043

Heated windscreen (left)3044

Anti-lock brake system module2545

Auxiliary power socket (floor console)2046

Trailer tow module2047

Not used-48

Not used-49Ignition relay, relay coils550

Power windows (rear)3051

142

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuses

Page 145: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 145/266

Protected ComponentsRelay Number

Key interlockR1

Wiper on or offR2

HornR3

Air conditioning clutchR4

Differential lockR5

Wiper Hi or LoR6

Engine cooling fan lowR7

Engine cooling fan highR8

Flex-fuel pump, vaporizer glow plugR9

Heated rear windowR10

Heated windscreenR11

Not usedR12

Electronic control module (ECM) powerhold

R13

IgnitionR14

4WD motor 2 (clockwise)R15

4WD motor 1 (counter clockwise)R16

4WD motorR17

Security hornR18

StarterR19

Not usedR20

Not usedR21

Not usedR22

Not usedR23

Not usedR24

143

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuses

Page 146: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 146/266

Protected ComponentsRelay Number

Not usedR25

Blower motorR26

Power seatR27

144

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuses

Page 147: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 147/266

Passenger Compartment Fuse Box

145

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuses

Page 148: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 148/266

Protected ComponentsFuse AmpRating

Fuse

Fuel pump2056

Not used-57

Not used-58

Passive anti-theft system (PAT)559

Interior lamp, driver's door switch pack, mood lights,puddle lights, automatic shifter, footwell lamp

1060

Not used-61

Rain sensor module562

Not used-63

Not used-64

Not used-65

Driver's door unlock, central double locking2066

Stop lamp switch567

Not used-68

Instrument cluster, integrated control module (ICP),tracking and blocking module

569

Central locking2070

Air conditioning571

Alarm horn7.572

On-board diagnostics II573

Main beam2074

Front fog lamps1575

Reversing lamp, rear view mirror1076

Washer pump2077

Ignition switch578

Audio signal DIN, FSAO audio, multi-function display1579

146

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuses

Page 149: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 149/266

Protected ComponentsFuse AmpRating

Fuse

Multi-function display, Hi audio, brake valve closing (BVC)module2080

Interior motion sensor581

Washer pump ground2082

Central locking ground2083

Driver's door unlock, central double locking ground2084

Instrument cluster, parking aid module, rear view camera,manual air conditioning, rear view mirror, tracking and

blocking module

7.585

Restraint system, passenger air-bag deactivation indicator1086

Tachograph587

Not used-88

Not used-89

Auxiliary Fuse Box

147

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuses

Page 150: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 150/266

Protected ComponentsFuse AmpRating

Fuse

Driving Light251

Position lamp152

LED beacon103

Work lights154

Spare205

Power point206

Reversing lamp157

Direction indicators, stop lamp158

Crew chief59

Disable fuse (isolator ground)510

Not used-11

Not used-12

Protected ComponentsRelay Number

Work lightsR1

LED beaconR2

SpareR3

Position lampR4

Direction indicator (left)R5

Direction indicator (right)R6

Stop lampR7

Not usedR8

Not usedR9

148

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuses

Page 151: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 151/266

CHANGING A FUSE

WARNINGS

Do not modify the electrical systemof your vehicle in any way. Haverepairs to the electrical system and

the replacement of relays and high currentfuses carried out by an authorized dealer.

Switch the ignition and all electricalequipment off before attempting tochange a fuse.

Always replace a fuse with one thathas the specified amperage rating.

Using a fuse with a higher amperagerating can cause severe wire damage andcould start a fire.

If electrical components in your vehicle are

not working, a fuse may have blown. Abreak in the fuse wire will indicate a blownfuse. Check the appropriate fuses beforereplacing any electrical components.

149

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Fuses

Page 152: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 152/266

GENERAL INFORMATION

Have your vehicle serviced regularly to helpmaintain its roadworthiness and resalevalue. There is a large network of Fordauthorized repairers that are there to helpyou with their professional servicingexpertise. Authorized repairers are bestqualified to service your vehicle properlyand expertly, with a wide range of highlyspecialized tools.

In addition to regular servicing, werecommend that you carry out thefollowing checks.

WARNINGSSwitch the ignition off beforetouching or attempting adjustmentof any kind.

Do not touch the electronic ignitionsystem parts after you have switchedthe ignition on or when the engine is

running. The system operates at highvoltage.

Keep your hands and clothing clear

of the engine cooling fan. Undercertain conditions, the fan may

continue to run for several minutes afteryou have switched the engine off.

Make sure that you fit filler capssecurely after carrying outmaintenance checks.

Daily Checks

• Exterior lamps.

• Interior lamps.

• Warning lamps and indicators.

Check When Refueling

• Engine oil level.  See Engine Oil Check(page 158).

• Brake fluid level.  See Brake andClutch Fluid Check (page 160).

• Washer fluid level.  See Washer FluidCheck (page 161).

• Tire pressures (when cold).  See

Technical Specifications (page 180).• Tire condition.  See Wheels and Tires

(page 174).

Monthly Checks

• Engine coolant level (engine cold).  SeeEngine Coolant Check (page 159).

• Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks.

• Air conditioning operation.

• Parking brake operation.

• Horn operation.

• Tightness of lug nuts.  See TechnicalSpecifications (page 180).

OPENING AND CLOSING THEHOOD

Opening the hood

1. Pull the lever under the instrumentpanel. For item location: SeeInstrument Panel Overview (page15). .

150

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 153: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 153/266

2. Raise the hood slightly.

3. Move the catch towards the left-handside of the vehicle.

4. Open the hood.

5. Support it with the strut.

Closing the hood

Note: Make sure that the hood is closed  properly.

Lower the hood and allow it to drop fromunder its own weight for the last 20 – 30centimeters (8 - 11 inches).

151

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 154: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 154/266

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.5L DURATEC-HE (122KW/165PS)- MI4

RHD

152

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 155: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 155/266

LHD

Engine coolant reservoir cap.  See Engine Coolant Check (page 159).A

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir cap.  See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page160).

B

Engine oil filler cap1.  See Engine Oil Check (page 158).C

Engine oil dipstick1.  See Engine Oil Check (page 158).D

Engine junction box.  See Fuses (page 138).E

Vehicle Identificaton Plate.  See Capacities and Specifications (page 182).F

Battery.  See Roadside Emergencies (page 135).G

Power steering fluid reservoir cap.  See Power Steering Fluid Check (page159).

H

Air Cleaner.I

Washer fluid reservoir cap.  See Washer Fluid Check (page 161).J1 The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.

153

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 156: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 156/266

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.2L DURATORQ-TDCI (PUMA)DIESEL

RHD

154

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 157: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 157/266

LHD

Engine coolant reservoir cap.  See Engine Coolant Check (page 159).A

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir cap.  See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page160).

B

Engine oil dipstick1.  See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 158).C

Engine oil filler cap1.  See Engine Oil Check (page 158).D

Fuel filter water trap.  See Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap (page 160).E

Engine junction box.  See Fuses (page 138).F

Vehicle Identificaton Plate.  See Capacities and Specifications (page 182).G

Battery.  See Roadside Emergencies (page 135).H

Power steering fluid reservoir cap.  See Power Steering Fluid Check (page159).

I

155

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 158: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 158/266

Page 159: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 159/266

LHD

Engine coolant reservoir cap.  See Engine Coolant Check (page 159).A

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir cap.  See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page160).

B

Engine oil dipstick1.  See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 158).C

Engine oil filler cap1.  See Engine Oil Check (page 158).D

Fuel filter water trap.  See Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap (page 160).E

Engine junction box.  See Fuses (page 138).F

Vehicle Identificaton Plate.  See Capacities and Specifications (page 182).G

Battery.  See Roadside Emergencies (page 135).H

Power steering fluid reservoir cap.  See Power Steering Fluid Check (page159).

I

157

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 160: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 160/266

Washer fluid reservoir cap.  See Washer Fluid Check (page 161).J

Air Cleaner.K1

 The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.5LDURATEC-HE (122KW/165PS)- MI4

MINA

MAXB

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.2LDURATORQ-TDCI (PUMA)DIESEL/3.2L DURATORQ-TDCI(PUMA) DIESEL

MINA

MAXB

ENGINE OIL CHECK

1. Make sure that your vehicle is on levelground.

2. Switch off the engine and wait 10minutes for the oil to drain into the oilpan.

3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it witha clean, lint free cloth. Replace thedipstick and remove it again to checkthe oil level.

If the oil level is at the minimum mark, addoil immediately.  See TechnicalSpecifications (page 169).

Note: Check the oil level before starting theengine.

Note: Make sure that the oil level is between the minimum and the maximum marks.

Note: Do not use oil additives or other engine treatments. Under certain conditions,they may damage the engine.

Note: The oil consumption of new engines reaches its normal level after approximately  3000 miles (5000 kilometers).

Adding Oil

WARNINGS

Only add oil when the engine is cold.If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutesfor the engine to cool down. Failure

to take care may result in personal injury.

Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running. Failure to takecare may result in personal injury.

158

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 161: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 161/266

1. Remove the filler cap.

2. Add oil that meets Ford specifications.See Technical Specifications (page

169).3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you

feel a strong resistance.

Note: Do not add oil further than the maximum mark. Oil levels above the maximum mark may cause engine damage.

Note: Soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately.

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK

WARNING

Do not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your physician.

Note: Make sure that the level is betweenthe MIN  and the MAX  marks.

Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. Thelevel may therefore extend beyond the MAX  mark.

If the level is at the MIN mark, add coolantimmediately.

Adding Engine Coolant

WARNINGS

Only add coolant when the engine iscold. If the engine is hot, wait 10minutes for the engine to cool down.

Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running.

Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is hot. Wait for the engineto cool down.

Undiluted coolant is flammable andmay ignite if spilt on a hot exhaust.

Note: In an emergency, you can add justwater to the cooling system to reach avehicle service station. Have the systemchecked by an authorized dealer as soon as

 possible.

Note: Prolonged use of incorrect dilutionof the coolant can cause engine damagefrom corrosion, overheating or freezing.

Note: Do not add coolant further than the MAX  mark.

1. Remove the filler cap. Any pressure willescape slowly as you unscrew the cap.

2. Add a 50/50 mixture of coolant and

water using fluid that meets the Fordspecifications.  See TechnicalSpecifications (page 169).

3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until youfeel a strong resistance.

POWER STEERING FLUIDCHECK

WARNING

Do not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your physician.

Note: Make sure that the fluid level is between the MIN  and the MAX  marks.

If the level is at the MIN mark, top upimmediately.  See TechnicalSpecifications (page 169).

Adding Power Steering Fluid

Note: Do not add fluid further than the MAX  mark.

1. Remove the filler cap.

2. Add fluid that meets Fordspecifications.  See TechnicalSpecifications (page 169).

3. Replace the filler cap.

159

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 162: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 162/266

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUIDCHECK

WARNINGSUse of any fluid other than therecommended brake fluid mayreduce brake efficiency and not meet

Ford's performance standards.

Do not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your doctor.

Clean the filler cap before removing.

Use only fluid that meets Fordspecifications and from a sealed

container.

Note: Keep brake fluid clean and dry.Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure.

Note: The brake and the clutch systems are supplied from the same reservoir.

The fluid level will drop slowly as thebrakes wear, and will rise when the brakecomponents are replaced.

Fluid levels between the MIN and MAXlines are within the normal operating range;there is no need to add fluid.

If the fluid levels are outside of the normaloperating range, the performance of thesystem could be compromised; seekservice from you authorized dealer

immediately.Top up with fluid that meets the Fordspecification.  See TechnicalSpecifications (page 169).

DRAINING THE FUEL FILTERWATER TRAP

WARNINGDo not dispose of diesel in householdrefuse or the public sewage system.Use your local authorized waste

disposal facilities.

Note: Only add fuel that meets the Ford  specification.  See Fuel Quality  (page 87).

Note: The in-tank pump will turn off  automatically after approximately 40

 seconds.

For item location: See Under Hood

Overview (page 154).  See Under HoodOverview (page 156).

1. Switch the ignition off.

2. Connect and secure a suitable hose onthe filter drain plug.

3. Route the other end of the hose to thesuitable container.

4. Loosen the drain plug by approximately1.5 turns.

160

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 163: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 163/266

5. Switch the ignition on to activate thein-tank pump.

6. Allow the water to drain.

7. Switch the ignition off.8. Tighten the drain plug and remove the

hose.

9. Start the engine and check for leaks.

Note: The water-in-fuel indicator lamp will go out after approximately 2 seconds, withthe engine running.

WASHER FLUID CHECK

Note: The reservoir supplies the front and  rear washer systems.

When adding fluid, use a mixture of washerfluid and water to help prevent freezing incold weather and improve the cleaningcapability. We recommend that you useonly high quality washer fluid.

For information on fluid dilution, refer tothe product instructions.

CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY

WARNING

You must replace the battery withone of exactly the samespecification.

Main Battery 

Note: Where applicable you must

 reprogram the audio system using the keycode.  See Security code (page 213).

The battery is located in the enginecompartment.  See Maintenance (page150).

Auxiliary Battery 

WARNING

Never jump start the vehicle at theauxiliary battery.

The auxiliary battery is located in theloadspace.  See Rear Exterior Overview(page 13).

The auxiliary battery powers the auxiliaryloads connected to the vehicle regardlessof the engine status. The vehicle chargingsystem charges it when the engine isrunning. When the engine is not running, itis isolated from the vehicle power supplyto prevent drain from the main battery.

Note: Auxiliary battery does not providecranking power to the engine.

CHECKING THE WIPERBLADES

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge ofthe blade to check for roughness.

Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid

or water applied with a soft sponge orcloth.

CHANGING THE WIPERBLADES

Set the windscreen wipers in the serviceposition to change the wiper blades.

To set the wiper in service position:

161

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 164: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 164/266

1. Turn the ignition key to position 0 fromposition II.

2. Pull the washer lever towards the

steering wheel within three seconds.You can use the service position in winterto provide easier access to the wiperblades for freeing them from snow and ice.The windscreen wipers will return to theirnormal position as soon as you switch theignition on, so make sure that the outsideof the windscreen is free from snow andice before you switch the ignition on.

To change the wiper blade:

1. Pull the wiper blade and arm awayfrom the glass.

2. Turn the wiper blade.

3. Release the lock.

4. Rotate the wiper blade.

5. Move in the direction shown.

6. Remove the wiper blade.

7. Install in the reverse order.

Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locksinto place. Lower the wiper arm and blade back to the windshield. The wiper arms will automatically return to their normal positionwhen the ignition is turned on.

CHANGING A BULB

WARNINGS

Switch the lamps and the ignition off.Failure to follow this warning couldresult in serious personal injury.

162

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 165: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 165/266

WARNINGS

Make sure the bulbs have cooleddown before removing them. Failure

to follow this warning could result inserious personal injury.

Note: Only fit bulbs of the correct specification.  See Bulb SpecificationChart (page 168).

Note: The following instructions describe how to remove the bulbs. Fit replacementsin the reverse order unless otherwise stated.

Headlamp

1. Open the hood.  See Opening andClosing the Hood (page 150).

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

3. Remove the rubber cover.

4. Release the clip and remove the bulb.

Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.

Note: Make sure that the rubber covers seals correctly against the bulb and  headlamp housing.

Side Lamp and Direction Indicator

Direction indicatorA

Side lampB

1. Remove the bulb holder by pulling itstraight out.

2. Remove the bulb.

Side Repeater

1. Slide the lens to the rear and removeit.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

163

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 166: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 166/266

Approach Lamp and Side Repeater

Side repeaterA

Approach lampB

Note: These lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if it fails.

Front Fog Lamps

Note: You cannot separate the fog lamp

 bulb from the bulb holder.

1. Disconnect the electrical connector.

2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwiseand remove it.

Rear Lamps

Type 1

Tail, Brake, Reversing, Fog Lamp andDirection Indicator

164

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 167: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 167/266

Tail and brake lampA

Direction indicatorB

Reversing lampC

Fog lamp (left-hand side forLHD)

D

1. Open the tail gate.

2. Remove the screws.

3. Remove the rear lamp.

4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwiseand remove it.

5. Remove the bulb.

Type 2

Tail, Brake, Reversing Lamp andDirection Indicator

Direction indicatorA

Tail and brake lampB

Reversing lampC

1. Remove the screws.

2. Remove the lamp lens.

3. Remove the bulb.

License Plate Lamp

Type 1

165

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 168: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 168/266

1. Carefully release the spring clip andremove the lamp.

2. Remove the connector with bulb.

3. Remove the bulb.

Type 2

1. Remove the screws.

2. Remove the lamp lens.

3. Remove the bulb.

Interior Lamp

Stretch and Double Cab

1. Carefully prise out the lamp.

2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwiseand remove it.

3. Remove the bulb.

Reading Lamp

Type 1

Without Alarm Sensor

1. Carefully prise out the lamp.

2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwiseand remove it.

3. Remove the bulb.

166

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 169: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 169/266

Type 2

With Alarm Sensor

1. Carefully prise out the lamp.

2. For reading lamps, turn the bulb holdercounterclockwise and remove it.

3. Remove the bulb.

4. For center lamp, remove the lamp lens.

5. Remove the bulb.

Central High Mounted Brake Lamp

Type 1

1. Remove the lamp lens.

2. Remove the screws.

3. Carefully prise out the lamp.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

5. Turn the bulb holder 45°counterclockwise and remove it.

6. Remove the bulb.

167

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 170: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 170/266

Type 2

1. Remove the lamp lens.

2. Remove the screws.

3. Carefully prise out the lamp.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

5. Remove the bulb holder by pulling itstraight out.

6. Remove the bulb.

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART

Power (watts)SpecificationBulb

55/60H4Headlamp main and dipped

beam

21P21WFront direction indicator

5W5WSide lamp

55H11Front fog lamp

5-Side repeater*

21WY21WRear direction indicator

21/5W21/5WTail and brake lamp

21W21WReversing lamp

21W21WRear fog lamp

5W5WNumber plate lamp

5W5WInterior lamp

168

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 171: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 171/266

Power (watts)SpecificationBulb

5W5WReading lamp

5W5WCenter high mount stoplamp

5W5WRoof bar lamp

* Bulb replacement is not possible as the

bulb is an integral part of the unit. The siderepeater lamp unit has to be changed.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Vehicle fluids

SpecificationRecommended fluidPart

WSS-M2C-913-CCastrol Engine OilEngine oil - Diesel (formarkets with low sulphur

content less than 350 ppm)WSS-M2C-913-D

WSS-M2C-921-ACastrol Engine OilEngine oil - Diesel (formarkets with high sulphurcontent greater than 350

ppm)

WSS-M2C-913-D

WSS M2C913-CCastrol Engine OilEngine oil - GasolineWSS-M2C-913-DWSS-M2C929-AWSS M2C930-AWSS M2C946-AWSS M2C945-A

WSD-M2C200-CCastrol - BOT130-MTransmission oil - Manual(MT-75)

WSS-M2C200-D2Castrol - BOT350-M3Transmission oil - Manual(MT-82)

WSS-M2C938-A (XT-10QLV)

Motorcraft MERCON® LVTransmission oil - Auto-matic

WSS-M6C65-A2 SuperDot4-14M

Clutch/Brake

WSS-M2C938-A (XT-10QLV)

Motorcraft MERCON® LVPower assisted steering

169

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 172: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 172/266

SpecificationRecommended fluidPart

WSS-M97B44-D (XLC-0F02)

Chevron / ArtecoCoolant

WSP-M2C197-AFront Axles

WSP-M2C197-ACastrolRear Axles

WSS-M2C938-A (XT-10QLV)

Motorcraft MERCON® LVTransfer Case

WSH-M17B19-AR134ARefrigerant

WSH-M1C231-BPOLYALKYLENE GLYCOLAC Compressor lubricant

Your engine has been designed to be used with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, which givesa fuel economy benefit whilst maintaining the durability of your engine.

Topping up the oil:

Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with low sulphur content less than 350 ppm): Ifyou are unable to find an oil that meets the specification defined in the vehicle fluidstable, you must use SAE 5W-30 that meets the specification defined by ACEA A5/B5.

Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with high sulphur content greater than 350 ppm):If you are unable to find an oil that meets the specification defined in the vehicle fluidstable, you must use SAE 10W-30 that meets the specification defined by API CH-4.

For gasoline engines only, if you are unable to find an oil that meets the specification

defined in the vehicle fluids table, you must use SAE 5W-20 or SAE 5W-30 that meetsthe specification defined by either ACEA A5/B5, API SM or API SN.

Using topping up oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine crankingperiods, reduced engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emissionlevels.

Castrol engine oil recommended.

170

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 173: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 173/266

Capacities

Capacity in Liters (gallons)ItemVariant

1.2 (0.26)Power assisted steeringfluid

All

5.5 (1.2)Windshield washer systemAll

80 (17.60)Fuel tankAll

10.5 (2.31)Transmission fluidAutomatic transmission(dry)

9 (1.97)Transmission fluidAutomatic transmission(wet)

1.7 (0.37)Transmission fluidManual transmission(MT75)

2.7 (0.59)Transmission fluidManual transmission(MT82)

8.6 (1.89)Engine oil - with filter2.2L Duratorq-TDCi

11.5 (2.53)Cooling system2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (MT75and MT82)

11.9 (2.62)Cooling system2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (AT)

9.75 (2.14)Engine oil - with filter3.2L Duratorq-TDCi

12.9 (2.84)Cooling system3.2L Duratorq-TDCi (MT82)

13.5 (2.97)Cooling system3.2L Duratorq-TDCi (AT)

6.7 (1.47)Engine oil - with filter2.5L Duratec-HE

11.0 (2.42)Cooling system2.5L Duratec-HE

171

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Maintenance

Page 174: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 174/266

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR

We recommend that you wash your vehicleregularly with a sponge and lukewarmwater containing a neutral pH carshampoo.

Never use strong household detergents orsoap, such as dish washing or laundryliquid. These products can discolor andcan cause spotting on painted surfaces.

Never wash your vehicle when it is hot tothe touch or during exposure to strong,direct sunlight.

Dry your vehicle with a chamois or softterry cloth towel in order to eliminate waterspotting.

Immediately remove items such asgasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings andinsect deposits as they can cause damageto your vehicle’s paintwork and trim overtime.

Suntan lotions and insect repellents candamage any painted surface. If thesesubstances come in to contact with your

vehicle, wash them off as soon as possible.

Using a Car Wash

WARNINGS

If you use a car wash with a waxingcycle, make sure that you remove thewax from the windshield.

Switch the heater blower off toprevent contamination of the freshair filter.

Prior to using a car wash facility check thesuitability of it for your vehicle.

Some car wash installations use water athigh pressure. This could damage certainparts of your vehicle.

Remove any exterior accessories, includingthe antenna, before using an automaticcar wash.

Cleaning the Headlamps

WARNINGS

Do not scrape the headlamp lensesor use abrasives, alcoholic solventsor chemical solvents to clean them.

Do not wipe the headlamps whenthey are dry.

Cleaning the Chrome Trim

Do not use abrasives or chemical solvents.Use soapy water.

Do not apply cleaning product to hotsurfaces.

Do not leave cleaning product on chromesurfaces longer than recommended.

Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners,or cleaning chemicals, may cause damageover a period of time.

Underbody 

Flush the complete underside of your

vehicle frequently. Keep body and doordrain holes free from packed dirt.

Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts

Use only approved products to cleanplastic parts.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

Note: Do not allow air fresheners and hand  sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be covered by your warranty.

Safety Belts

WARNINGS

Do not use abrasives, or chemicalsolvents to clean them.

172

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Vehicle Care

Page 175: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 175/266

WARNINGS

Do not allow moisture to penetratethe safety belt retractor mechanism.

Clean them with interior cleaner or waterapplied with a soft sponge. Let them drynaturally, away from artificial heat.

Instrument Cluster Screens, LCDScreens and Radio Screens

WARNING

Do not use abrasives, alcoholicsolvents or chemical solvents to

clean them.

Rear Windows

WARNING

Do not use any abrasive materials toclean the interior of the rearwindows.

Note: Do not install stickers or labels to the

interior of the rear windows.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINTDAMAGE

You should repair paintwork damagecaused by stones from the road or minorscratches as soon as possible. A choice ofproducts are available from an authorizeddealer.

Remove particles such as bird droppings,tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, roadsalt and industrial fallout before repairingpaint chips.

Always read and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions before using the products.

CLEANING THE ALLOYWHEELS

Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical towarm or hot wheel rims and covers.

Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, incombination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear away theclear coat finish over a period of time.

Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steelwool, fuels or strong household detergent.

Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for  an extended period after cleaning thewheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.This will reduce the risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and linings.

Note: Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims and covers.

Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coatedwith a clear coat paint finish. To maintaintheir condition we recommend that you:

• Clean them weekly with therecommended wheel and tire cleaner.

• Use a sponge to remove heavydeposits of dirt and brake dustaccumulation.

• Rinse them thoroughly with apressurized stream of water when youhave completed the cleaning process.

We recommend that you use Ford servicewheel cleaner. Make sure that you readand follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

Using other non-recommended cleaningproducts can result in severe andpermanent cosmetic damage.

173

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Vehicle Care

Page 176: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 176/266

GENERAL INFORMATION

A decal with tire pressure data is locatedin the driver’s door opening.

Check and set the tire pressure at theambient temperature in which you areintending to drive your vehicle and whenthe tires are cold.

Note: Check your tire pressures regularly tooptimize fuel economy.

Note: Use only approved wheel and tire sizes. Using other sizes could damage your vehicle and will make the National Type

 Approval invalid.Note: If you change the diameter of the tiresfrom that fitted at the factory, the speedometer may not display the correct speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have the engine management system reprogrammed.

Note: If you intend to change the size of thewheels from that fitted at the factory, checkthe suitability with an authorized dealer.

USING WINTER TIRES

If winter tires are used you must make surethat you use the correct tire pressures.  SeeTechnical Specifications (page 180).

USING SNOW CHAINS

WARNINGS

Do not exceed 31 mph (50 km/h).

Do not use snow chains on snow-freeroads.

Only fit snow chains to specifiedtires.  See Technical Specifications(page 180).

WARNINGS

If your vehicle has wheel trims,remove them before fitting snow

chains.

Only use snow chains of 10 millimeters orsmaller.

Only use snow chains on the driven wheels.

Note: The anti-lock brake system willcontinue to operate normally.

Vehicles with Stability Control

When stability control is on, your vehicle

may exhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics. To reduce this, switchtraction control off.  See Using TractionControl (page 106).

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL

Lug Nuts

You can obtain replacement locking lugnuts or a locking lug nut key using thereference number certificate.

Vehicles with a Spare Wheel

If the spare wheel is the same type andsize as your vehicle road wheel, you can fitthe spare wheel and continue to drive inthe normal manner.

WARNING

Only fit snow chains to specified

tires.  See Technical Specifications(page 180).

Note: Your vehicle may exhibit someunusual driving characteristics.

174

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Wheels and Tires

Page 177: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 177/266

Vehicle Jack

WARNINGS

Do not use the vehicle jack otherthan when you are changing a wheelin an emergency.

The vehicle jack must not bedamaged or deformed and thethread is lubricated and free from

foreign material.

Never place anything between thevehicle jack and the ground.

Never place anything between the

vehicle jack and your vehicle.

Use a workshop type hydraulic jack forchanging between summer and wintertires.

Note: Use a jack with a minimum liftingcapacity of one tonne (one ton) and a lifting plate with a minimum diameter of 3.1496 in(80 mm).

The jack, wheel brace, and jack handle are

located in the cab.

Single Cab

1. Fold the left-hand side seatbackforward.

2. Remove the locking strap and removethe tools.

1. Fold the right-hand side seatbackforward.

175

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Wheels and Tires

Page 178: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 178/266

2. Loosen the jack, remove the bolt andremove the jack.

Stretch Cab

1. Pull the release strap.

2. Remove the rear seats.

3. Remove the cover.

4. Remove the bolt.

5. Remove the jack.

6. Remove the tools.Double Cab

1. Lift the release strap.

176

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Wheels and Tires

Page 179: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 179/266

2. Lower the seatback.

3. Remove the locking strap.

4. Remove the bolt.

5. Remove the jack.

Spare Wheel

Note: The spare wheel is located underneath the rear of the vehicle.

1. Assemble the handle.

2. Fully insert the jack handle into theguide hole. Turn counter-clockwiseuntil the wheel rests on the ground, andthere is slack in the cable.

3. Pass the bracket and cable through thewheel opening.

Jacking and Lifting Points

WARNINGYou must use the specified jackingpoints.

177

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Wheels and Tires

Page 180: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 180/266

Emergency use onlyA

MaintenanceB

Removing a Road Wheel

WARNINGS

Park your vehicle so that you do notobstruct the flow of traffic or placeyourself in any danger and set up a

warning triangle.

Make sure that your vehicle is on firmand level ground with the front

wheels pointing straight ahead.Switch the ignition off and apply theparking brake.

If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, shift into first or reversegear. If your vehicle has an automatic

transmission, shift into park (P).

Make sure all passengers are out ofyour vehicle.

178

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Wheels and Tires

Page 181: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 181/266

WARNINGS

Chock the diagonally opposite wheelto the punctured tire with an

appropriate block or wheel chock.Do not work on your vehicle whenthe jack is the only support. If thevehicle slips off the jack, you or

someone else could be seriously injured.

Make sure that the vehicle jack isvertical to the jacking point and thebase is flat on the ground.

Note: Do not lay alloy road wheels face

down on the ground.

1. Assemble the jack handle.

Note: Assemble the three handles to jackthe rear of the vehicle.

2. Loosen the lug nuts.

3. Raise your vehicle until the tire is clearof the ground.

4. Remove the lug nuts and the roadwheel.

Installing a Road Wheel

WARNINGS

Use only approved wheel and tiresizes. Using other sizes coulddamage your vehicle and will make

the National Type Approval invalid.  SeeTechnical Specifications (page 180).

Do not fit run flat tyres on vehiclesthat were not originally fitted withthem. Please contact your dealer for

more details regarding compatibility.

Make sure there is no lubrication(grease or oil) on the threads or thesurface between the wheel lugs and

nuts. This can cause the lug nuts to loosenwhile driving.

Do not install alloy wheels using lugnuts designed for use with steelwheels.

Note: Alloy wheel lug nuts are suitable for use on a steel spare wheel for a short time(maximum two weeks).

Note: Make sure the wheel and hub contact surfaces are free from foreign matter.

179

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Wheels and Tires

Page 182: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 182/266

Note: Make sure that the cones on the lug nuts are against the wheel.

1. Install the wheel.

2. Install the lug nuts and finger tight.3. Install the locking lug nut key.

4. Install all of the lug nuts and partiallytighten them in the sequence shown.

5. Lower your vehicle and remove thevehicle jack.

6. Fully tighten all of the lug nuts in thesequence shown.  See Technical

Specifications (page 180).

7. Position the projection of the cap andthe projection of the hub correctly.

WARNING

Have the lug nuts checked fortightness and the tire pressurechecked as soon as possible.

Note: If the spare wheel is different in sizeor construction to the road wheels, have this replaced as soon as possible.

Stowing the Flat Tire

WARNING

Do not raise the spare wheel carrierwithout the wheel attached. Damagecan occur to the winch mechanism

if lowered without a wheel attached.

1. Place the wheel flat on the ground,outside of the wheel facing down.

2. Tilt the bracket, and pass it through thecenter of the wheel.

3. Fully insert the jack handle into theguide hole and turn clockwise.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Lug nut torque

Nm (Ib-ft)Wheel type

135 (99.6)All

180

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Wheels and Tires

Page 183: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 183/266

Tire pressures (cold tires)

Full loadEconomy Normal load

Tire sizeVariant RearFrontRearFrontRearFront

bar (psi)bar (psi)bar (psi)bar (psi)bar (psi)bar (psi)

3.8 (54)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)2.4 (35)2.4 (35)215/70 R

16*4x2

3.0 (44)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)2.4 (35)2.4 (35)255/70 R

16*All

3.0 (44)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)2.4 (35)2.4 (35)265/65 R

17*All

3.0 (44)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)2.4 (35)2.4 (35)265/60

R 18*All

*Only fit snow chains to specified tires.

181

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Wheels and Tires

Page 184: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 184/266

VEHICLE DIMENSIONS

Single cab

182

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Capacities and Specifications

Page 185: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 185/266

Dimension in mm(inches)

Dimension DescriptionItem

5359 (211.0)Maximum lengthA

5434 (214.0)Maximum length - with bull barsA

1850 (72.8)Overall width - excluding exterior mirrorsB

1703 (67.0)Overall height (4x2)C

1800-1806 (70.9-71.1)Overall height (4x2* or 4x4)C

3220 (126.8)WheelbaseD

1590 (62.6)Track - front and rear (4x2)E

1560 (61.4)Track - front and rear (4x2* or 4x4)E

*Vehicles with increased ride height

4-door stretch cab

183

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Capacities and Specifications

Page 186: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 186/266

Dimension in mm(inches)

Dimension DescriptionItem

5359 (211.0)Maximum lengthA

1850 (72.8)Overall width - excluding exterior mirrorsB

1706 (67.2)Overall height (4x2)C

1804-1810 (71.0-71.2)1

Overall height (4x2* or 4x4)C

3220 (126.8)WheelbaseD

1590 (62.6)Track - front and rear (4x2)E

1560 (61.4)Track - front and rear (4x2* or 4x4)E

1Depending on tyre size

*

Vehicles with increased ride height

184

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Capacities and Specifications

Page 187: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 187/266

Double cab

185

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Capacities and Specifications

Page 188: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 188/266

Dimension in mm(inches)

Dimension DescriptionItem

5359 (211.0)Maximum lengthA

5434 (214.0)Maximum length - with bull barsA

1850 (72.8)Overall width - excluding exterior mirrorsB

1716 (67.5)Overall height (4x2)C

1815-1848 (71.4-72.8)1

Overall height (4x2* or 4x4)C

3220 (126.8)WheelbaseD

1590 (62.6)Track - front and rear (4x2)E

1560 (61.4)Track - front and rear (4x2* or 4x4)E

1 Depending on tyre size

*Vehicles with increased ride height

186

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Capacities and Specifications

Page 189: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 189/266

TOWBAR DIMENSIONS

4x2

187

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Capacities and Specifications

Page 190: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 190/266

4x2 (vehicles with increased ride height) and 4x4

Dimension in mm(inches)

Dimension DescriptionItem

124 ± 5 (4.8 ± 0.2)Attachment point - centre of tow ball (4x2)A

221.5 ± 5 (8.7 ± 0.2)Attachment point - centre of tow ball (4x2* or 4x4)A

188

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Capacities and Specifications

Page 191: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 191/266

Dimension in mm(inches)

Dimension DescriptionItem

588 (23.1)Centre of tow ball - side memberB

1176 (46.3)Outside of side memberC

419 ± 5 (16.5 ± 0.2)Centre of tow ball - centre of 1st attachment point

(4x2)D

363 ± 5 (14.3 ± 0.2)Centre of tow ball - centre of 1st attachment point

(4x2* or 4x4)

D

442 ± 5 (17.4 ± 0.2)Centre of tow ball - centre of 2nd attachment point

(4x2)E

386 ± 5 (15.2 ± 0.2)Centre of tow ball - centre of 2nd attachment point(4x2

* or 4x4)

E

542 ± 5 (21.3 ± 0.2)Centre of tow ball - centre of 3rd attachment point

(4x2)F

486 ± 5 (19.1 ± 0.2)Centre of tow ball - centre of 3rd attachment point

(4x2* or 4x4)

F

785 ± 5 (30.9 ± 0.2)Center of tow ball - centre of 4th attachment point

(4x2)G

728 ± 5 (28.7 ± 0.2)Center of tow ball - centre of 4th attachment point(4x2

* or 4x4)

G

429 ± 5 (16.8 ± 0.2)Center of tow ball - centre of 5th attachment point

(4x2)H

373 ± 5 (14.7 ± 0.2)Center of tow ball - centre of 5th attachment point

(4x2* or 4x4)

H

504 ± 5 (19.8 ± 0.2)Center of tow ball - centre of 6th attachment point

(4x2)J

448 ± 5 (17.6 ± 0.2)Center of tow ball - centre of 6th attachment point(4x2* or 4x4)J

*Vehicles with increased ride height

189

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Capacities and Specifications

Page 192: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 192/266

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONPLATE

Vehicle identification numberA

Gross vehicle weightB

Gross train weightC

Maximum front axle weightD

Maximum rear axle weightE

The vehicle identification plate with yourvehicle identification number andmaximum weights is located on thebottom of the lock side of the passengerdoor aperture.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER

The vehicle identification number is on theleft-hand side of the instrument panel.

The vehicle identification number is alsostamped beneath the front door on thechassis, on the right-hand side.

190

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Capacities and Specifications

Page 193: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 193/266

GENERAL INFORMATION

Press the relevant button on the unit bezelto access the system functions. This willtake you into the selected mode.

One hour mode

To conserve battery power, the system canbe operated in one hour mode. If theignition is off, press the ON/OFF button toswitch the system on. The system willautomatically switch off after one hour.

System notes

WARNINGS

The indicated maximum speed maynot be applicable to your vehicle. Itis always your responsibility to

control the vehicle, supervise any systemand obey the correct speed limit.

The front glass on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if hit with a hardobject. If the glass breaks, do not

touch the liquid crystalline material. In case

of contact with the skin, wash immediatelywith soap and water.

The unit is a highgrade laser productwhich uses an invisible laser beam.If this is handled incorrectly it can

emit dangerous rays. Do not attempt tolook through any openings in the unit.

CAUTIONS

Irregular shaped CDs and CDs with a

scratch protection film or selfadhesive labels attached should not

be used. Warranty claims, where this typeof disc is found to be inside an audio unitreturned for repair, will not be accepted.

Do not clean the unit with solvents oraerosol cleaning agents. Use only adamp cloth.

CAUTIONS

Do not insert foreign objects into anyof the unit disc drives or media card

slots.Do not insert more than one disc intothe unit disc drive.

Use only 12 cm (4.7 inches) discs or 8cm (3.1 inches) discs with a suitableadaptor.

Do not attempt to open the unit. If theunit malfunctions consult your dealer.

Improper use of settings andconnections, other than thoseexplained in this manual, can damage

the unit.

Do not turn the ignition key or attemptto start the engine while the softwareis updating.

The system is recommended for use whenthe ignition key is turned to the accessoryposition or when the engine is running. Ifthe system is used extensively when the

engine is not running, care needs to betaken to avoid draining the battery.

ROAD SAFETY

WARNINGS

The system provides you withinformation designed to help youreach your destination quickly and

safely.

For reasons of safety, the drivershould only program the systemwhen the vehicle is stationary.

The system provides no assistancewith respect to stop signs, trafficlights, areas under construction or

other important safety information.

191

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Navigation introduction

Page 194: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 194/266

WARNINGS

Do not use the system until you havefamiliarized yourself with its

operation.Only view the system display whendriving conditions permit.

Safety information

Read and follow all stated safetyprecautions. Failure to do so may increaseyour risk of collision and personal injury.Ford Motor Company shall not be liablefor any damages of any type arising from

failure to follow these guidelines.

If detailed viewing of route instructions isnecessary, pull off the road when it is safeto do so and park your vehicle.

Do not use the navigation system to locateemergency services.

To use the system as effectively and safelyas possible, always use the latestnavigation information. Your dealer will beable to assist with this.

192

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Navigation introduction

Page 195: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 195/266

Vehicles with SD navigationsystem

The system has a large range of features,

yet is easy and intuitive to use. Routeguidance is shown on the display screen.The screen provides full information foroperating the system through the use ofmenus, text screens and map displays.Screen selections are made by scrollingthrough the menus using the up, down, leftand right arrow buttons and pressing theOK button to activate the desired setting.

Basic operation

1. Press either the NAV or MENU buttonto enter the menu structure.

2. Use the up, down, left and right arrowbuttons and scroll through the variousselection lists.

3. Press the OK button to activate yourselection.

Selection lists

Various screens are presented which offer

a selection list of available options.

1. Select the option you require, or if it isnot shown on the screen use the upand down arrow buttons to view theremainder of the selection list.

2. Press the OK button to confirm yourselection.

Alphanumeric keypad entry 

When it is necessary to enter an address,

a keypad will appear prompting you toenter a postcode, city, or street.

1. Use the up, down, left and right arrowbuttons to select the letter or numberthat you require.

Note: As you spell the entry the results will appear in the display.

Note: The system will limit your entries toonly those characters which spell a valid entry.

2. Press the OK button to activate yourselection.

Route setting example

Navigation main screen

• To select the navigation system, pressthe NAV button. The road safetycaution will be displayed. To use thesystem, read the caution and press theOK button.

Destination input screen• Use the up and down arrow buttons

and scroll to Destination input.

• Press the OK button to activate yourselection.

Note: A list with several options is shown.

• Starting from the top, select thecountry followed by either thepostcode if available or city and streetname.

• Use the alphanumeric keypad andselection lists to select your addressdetails.

• Once sufficient information has beenentered, scroll to Start guidance andpress the OK button to activate yourselection.

Note: If you only need to navigate to a city center for example, full address details are not required.

• The route is now calculated and thescreen returns to the main navigationscreen with instructions on how toproceed.

• Follow the screen information andvoice prompts to reach yourdestination.

193

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Navigation Quick start

Page 196: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 196/266

Descriptions for function buttons1-4

A

Function buttons 1 to 4 are contextdependent, and change according to thecurrent unit mode. Descriptions for thefunctions are shown at the bottom of thescreen display.

194

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Navigation unit overview

Page 197: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 197/266

Vehicles with SD navigation system

Function 1.A

Function 2.B

Seek down. CD track selection.See Station tuning control

(page 216).  See Track selection(page 221).

C

On/off and volume control.D

Seek up. CD track selection.  SeeStation tuning control (page216).  See Track selection (page221).

E

Function 3.F

Function 4.G

OK.H

Telephone keypad, stationpresets and navigation keypad.See Using the telephone (page231).  See Station preset

buttons (page 217).  SeeNavigation Quick start (page193).

I

Clock.J

Traffic announcement.  SeeTraffic information control(page 218).

K

Navigation arrows.L

195

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Navigation unit overview

Page 198: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 198/266

Map.M

Information.N

Door lock indicator.OHazard warning flasher switch.P

Door lock button.  See Lockingand Unlocking (page 36).

Q

Navigation.R

Menu select.S

Phone menu.  See Telephone(page 229).

T

Auxiliary, USB and iPod select.

See Auxiliary Power Points(page 79).  See Auxiliary inputjack (page 226).

U

Radio and waveband select.  SeeAudio unit operation (page216).

V

CD eject.  See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).

W

CD select.  See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).

X

LOADING THE NAVIGATIONDATA

Loading the navigation data

1. Load the navigation SD card into theaperture.

2. Press the NAV button. The road safety

warning will be shown in the display.3. Use the up and down arrow buttons to

select the required feature.

4. Press the OK button to confirm yourselection.

For map updates and system upgradesplease refer to your dealer.

196

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Navigation unit overview

Page 199: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 199/266

Most of the important settings for yournavigation unit can be accessed via theMENU or NAV button. The followingsection describes the various options and

how to use them.

For menu structures: See InformationDisplays (page 59).

Menu structure - Information andentertainment display - Vehicleswith navigation system

Route

This feature allows you to customize the

route to your specific journey requirements(for example continue route guidance,block specific sections of your route orselect specific sections of a route).

Destination input

This feature allows you to enter yourdestination details (for example enter citynames, enter street names or pick a placefrom a map).

TrafficThis feature allows you to customize howyou receive traffic information (forexample review and sort traffic messages,review your route or block parts of yourroute).

Home address

This feature allows you to start the routeguidance to your home address or change

the details of your home address.Last destinations

This feature allows quick access to ahistory of previous destinations entered inthe system. A detailed display will showthe complete stored information includingan overview map. Select the requiredrepeat destination from the list.

Favourites

This feature allows you to customize apersonal destination address book and

assign user defined names to addressesand locations. A detailed display will showthe complete stored information includingan overview map. Select the requiredrepeat destination from the list.

Points of interest

This feature allows you to customize theroute to your specific journey requirements(for example select a museum on route ora specific point of interest near your

destination).

Tour planning

This feature allows you to enter a numberof different destinations and select theorder in which you wish to visit them. Youcan also modify an existing tour or recall aprevious tour. The system willautomatically calculate and display yourchosen journey.

Store position

This feature allows you to store and nameyour current position.

Route options

This feature allows you to customize theroute to your specific journey requirements(for example select the fastest or mosteconomical route or select a route that willavoid tunnels, seasonal roads and toll

roads).

Special functions

This feature allows you to select GPS andsystem information or a demonstration ofthe system functionality.

197

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

System settings

Page 200: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 200/266

Map display 

This feature allows you to change the waythe map screen is displayed (for example

clean 2D and clean 3D view) and tocustomize display information for yourjourney (for example time to arrival andlane guidance).

Assistance options

This feature allows you to customizedisplay information for your journey (forexample signs, lanes and speed limits).

Personal data

This feature allows you to edit and deletepersonal data (for example your homeaddress).

Reset all settings

This feature allows you to reset thenavigation settings.

Menu structure - Information andentertainment display - All

 vehiclesAudio settings

Adaptive volume

This feature allows you to adjust thevolume level to compensate for engine androad speed noise. You can turn this on andoff.  See Automatic volume control(page 219).

Sound

This feature allows you to adjust the soundsettings (for example bass and treble.

Nav audio mixing

This feature allows you to adjust thevolume mix between the navigation voiceoutput and audio source.

DSP settings

This feature allows you to customizespeaker output relevant to seat positions.

See Digital signal processing (DSP)(page 219).

DSP equaliser

This feature allows you to select the musiccategory that most suits your listeningpreference. The audio output will changeto enhance the particular style of musicchosen.  See Digital signal processing(DSP) (page 219).

NewsThis feature allows you to receive newsbulletins from stations on the FMwaveband or radio data system (RDS) andenhanced other network (EON) linkedstations, in the same way as trafficinformation is provided. You can turn thison and off.  See News broadcasts (page219).

Alternative frequencies

This feature will search for and switch tothe strongest station signal when movingfrom one transmission area to another.See Alternative frequencies (page 219).

RDS regional

This feature controls the behaviour of AFswitching between regionally relatednetworks of a parent broadcaster.  SeeRegional mode (REG) (page 220).

Bluetooth

This feature allows you to switchBluetooth on or off.

Clock settings

Set time

This feature allows you to manually adjustthe time.

198

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

System settings

Page 201: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 201/266

Set date

This feature allows you to manually adjustthe date, month and year.

GPS time

This feature allows you to, if in a suitablecoverage area, automatically adjust thedate and time using GPS.

Set time zone

This feature allows you select a specifictime zone.

Summertime

This feature allows you set the system toadjust for seasonal time differences.

Note: GPS time must be selected.

24-hour mode

This feature allows you to adjust thesystem between 12 and 24-hour mode.

199

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

System settings

Page 202: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 202/266

ROUTE OPTIONS MENU

You can set a number of options whichalter the way a route is planned.

Using the up, down, left and right arrowbuttons, you can select from the list whichroad features are to be avoided or includedin the route by turning the feature on or off.

Route

Eco

This option will prioritize the mosteconomical route to the destination.

Fast

This option will prioritize the fastest routeto the destination.

Short

This option will prioritize the shortest routeto the destination..

Always ask

Use this feature to make sure that you arealways given the choice of route typeselection for your journey.

Driver

Leisurely 

This option will prioritize the route for aleisurely drive to the destination.

Normal

This option will prioritize the route for anormal drive to the destination.

Fast

This option will prioritize the route for afast drive to the destination.

Eco settings

Trailer

Use this feature to change the economysettings of your journey relating to whetheror not you are towing a trailer and if so thesize of trailer being towed.

Roof box

Use this feature to change the economysettings of your journey relating to the useof a roof box.

Dynamic

When switched on, and if the unit isreceiving a valid traffic message channel(TMC) signal, the route will beautomatically updated to take intoaccount real time traffic incidents orcongestion.

Note: This feature can be useful in avoidingdelays or hold ups on journeys.

Motorway 

When switched on the system will look forfreeways on your route and automaticallyupdate your route distance and timings.

Note: This feature can be useful in avoidingdelays or hold ups on journeys.

Ferry/motorail

When switched on the system will look forferry crossings and motorail facilities onyour route and automatically update your

route distance and timings.

Toll

When switched on the system will look fortoll roads on your route and automaticallyupdate your route distance and timings.

200

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Navigation system

Page 203: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 203/266

Seasonal roads

When switched on the system will look forseasonal roads on your route and

automatically update your route distanceand timings.

Note: This feature can be useful in avoidingdelays or hold ups on journeys.

Toll sticker

When switched on the system willautomatically select toll roads and updateyour route distance and timings.

ROUTE DISPLAYS

Map display 

Press the MAP button for a map view.

This view will show your current locationwith your vehicle in the center shown asan arrow surrounded by a circle. The arrowwill face in the direction of travel.

The information on the top line gives the

name of the current road, or the next roadto take if a turn is approaching.

You can change the way the map isdisplayed by altering the zoom andorientation settings. Press the relevantfunction buttons to change the map scaleand using the left and right arrow buttonszoom in or out. The current map scale isshown on the display.

Map scale settings may be set between50 meters to 500 kilometers or 0.05 milesto 500 miles, with an auto setting to thefar left. The auto setting continuouslychanges the map scale according to theroad type being driven.

Junction zoom

This feature will automatically increasethe zoom on the map display at times

when you are required to make a turn, orperform more complex maneuvres. Shortlyafter the zoom scale will return to theprevious level.

Select AUTO to activate junction zoom.

Navigation display 

After commencing a navigation route, thedefault screen is the main navigationscreen:

Once an active route is underway, guidancewill be given by on-screen information andvoice prompts. Whichever audio sourceyou wish to leave the unit in, basic turn byturn and distance information will remainon the screen in the form of a graphic inset.You do not need to leave the unit on themain navigation screen when you arenavigating a route. Slightly more detailedinformation on your route may be availablevia the main navigation screen if required.

WARNING

Do not rely on the screen promptswhen navigating. Always listen to thenavigation voice and take care not

be distracted from the road ahead.

201

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Navigation system

Page 204: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 204/266

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Traffic message channel (TMC) stationsare broadcast on the FM waveband. TMCis a feature that receives traffic alertswhich can be used to plan alternativeroutes and avoid hold ups.

USING TMC

Press the TA or TRAFFIC button to showthe traffic menu page.

Traffic announcement

Traffic announcement (TA) can be turnedon or off via this menu. If switched on a TAindicator is shown in the informationborder of the status bar.

Stations which broadcast on the FMwaveband and carry traffic program (TP)information are identified by TP shown inthe screen display. With TA switched onthe unit will respond to theseannouncements and interrupt music

playback. After the announcement hasended music playback will resume.

Ending traffic announcements

The unit will return to normal operation atthe end of each traffic announcement. Toend the announcement prematurely, pressthe TA, TRAFFIC, RADIO or CD buttonduring the announcement.

Using TMC messages

Select the required item to display a list ofTMC messages.  See GeneralInformation (page 59).  This is only anoverview display which gives very basicinformation. Select the message yourequire further information on and anotherscreen will be displayed giving full messagedetails on incident location etc.

You may either select a view which showsmessages only affecting your programmedroute, or a view which shows all messagesreceived. Press function button 1 to change

the view.

Hazard spot warning (dependingon country)

Note: The availability of this feature willvary from country to country.

The system supports a hazard spotwarning feature which informs you withvisible and audible feedback abouthazardous traffic areas. The system is off

by default. You can switch the system onand off using the information display.  SeeInformation Displays (page 59).

202

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Traffic Message Channel

Page 205: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 205/266

The road network is constantly changingdue to new roads, changes in roadclassification, etc. Therefore, it is notalways possible to exactly match the map

data in the system to the current roadnetwork.

Map information is regularly updated, butall areas are not necessarily covered to thesame level of detail. Some roads, inparticular private roads, may not beincluded on the database. To help withaccuracy, always use the latest versionnavigation disc. Your dealer will be able toprovide this.

203

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Map updates

Page 206: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 206/266

IMPORTANT AUDIOINFORMATION

WARNINGSDue to technical incompatibility,recordable (CD-R) and rewritable(CD-RW) discs may not function

correctly.

These CD radio units will playcompact discs that conform to theInternational Red Book standard

audio specification. Copy protected CDsfrom some manufacturers do not conformto this standard and playback cannot beguaranteed.

Dual format, dual sided discs (DVDPlus, CD-DVD format), adopted bythe music industry, are thicker than

normal CDs and consequently playbackcannot be guaranteed, and jamming couldoccur. Irregular shaped CDs and CDs witha scratch protection film or self adhesivelabels attached should not be used.Warranty claims, where this type of disc is

found to be inside an audio unit returnedfor repair, will not be accepted.

All CD units are designed to playcommercially pressed 12 cm audiocompact discs only.

The audio unit may be damaged ifunsuitable items like credit cards orcoins are pushed inside the CD

aperture.

Audio unit labels

Disc labels

Audio CD

MP3

204

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio introduction

Page 207: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 207/266

Note: Units have an integrated multifunction display situated above the CD aperture. This shows important information regarding control of your audio unit.

 Additionally, there are various icons placed  around the display screen which light upwhen a function is active (for example CD,Radio or Aux.)

Type of audio unit and relevant multifunction display:

Type 0:Base audio without CD

Type 1: Base audio with CD

Type 2: Base display

Type 3: Large display

Type 4: 4.2 inch color display

Type 5: 5 inch NAV color display

Type 0

Volume/menu control.A

LCD display.B

Seek down (long press). Manualtune down (short press).  SeeStation tuning control (page216).

C

Display time/date and RDSinformation.

D

On/off (long press) and mute(short press).

E

Seek up (long press). Manualtune up (short press).  SeeStation tuning control (page

216).

F

Audio mode select.  See Audiounit operation (page 216). SeeAuxiliary Power Points (page79).  See Auxiliary input jack(page 226).

G

Scan and auto store.H

Station preset 6.  See Stationpreset buttons (page 217).

I

Station preset 5.  See Station

preset buttons (page 217).

J

Station preset 4.  See Stationpreset buttons (page 217).

K

Station preset 3.  See Stationpreset buttons (page 217).

L

Station preset 2.  See Stationpreset buttons (page 217).

M

Station preset 1.  See Stationpreset buttons (page 217).

N

Menu back.O

Type 1

CD eject.  See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).

A

Volume/menu control.B

205

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio unit overview

Page 208: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 208/266

CD Aperture.C

LCD display.D

Seek down. CD trackselect/Fast-rewind.  SeeStation tuning control (page216).  See Track selection (page221).

E

Display time/date and RDSinformation.

F

On/off (long press) and mute(short press).

G

Seek up. CD track

select/Fast-forward.  SeeStation tuning control (page216).  See Track selection (page221).

H

Radio and waveband select.  SeeAudio unit operation (page216).

I

Scan and auto store.J

Station preset 6. Shuffle.  SeeStation preset buttons (page217).

K

Station preset 5. Repeat.  SeeStation preset buttons (page217).

L

Station preset 4. Next folder.See Station preset buttons(page 217).

M

Station preset 3. Previous folder.See Station preset buttons(page 217).

N

Station preset 2. Scroll display.

See Station preset buttons(page 217).

O

Station preset 1. Menu back.  SeeStation preset buttons (page217).

P

Select CD/Auxiliary.  SeeCompact Disc Player (page221).  See Auxiliary PowerPoints (page 79).  SeeAuxiliary input jack (page 226).

Q

206

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio unit overview

Page 209: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 209/266

Type 2

CD eject.  See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).

A

CD select.  See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).

B

Seek down. CD track selection.See Station tuning control(page 216).  See Track selection(page 221).

C

On/off and volume control.D

Seek up. CD track selection.  SeeStation tuning control (page216).  See Track selection (page221).

E

Station presets.  See Stationpreset buttons (page 217).

F

Menu select.G

Information.H

Navigation arrows.ITraffic announcement.  SeeTraffic information control(page 218).

J

Door lock indicator.K

Hazard warning flasher switch.L

Door lock button.  See Lockingand Unlocking (page 36).

M

207

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio unit overview

Page 210: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 210/266

Menu entry/exit.N

Sound button.  See Soundbutton (page 216).

O

Auxiliary select.  See Auxiliary Power Points (page 79).  SeeAuxiliary input jack (page 226).

P

Radio and waveband select.  SeeAudio unit operation (page216).

Q

Type 3 and Type 4

Descriptions for function buttons1-4

A

208

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio unit overview

Page 211: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 211/266

Function 1.A

Function 2.B

Seek down. CD track selection.See Station tuning control(page 216).  See Track selection(page 221).

C

On/off and volume control.D

Seek up. CD track selection.  SeeStation tuning control (page216).  See Track selection (page221).

E

Function 3.F

Function 4.G

Menu select.H

Telephone keypad and stationpresets.  See Using thetelephone (page 231).  SeeStation preset buttons (page217).

I

Navigation arrows.J

Traffic announcement.  SeeTraffic information control(page 218).

K

Information.L

Door lock indicator.M

Hazard warning flasher switch.N

Door lock button.  See Lockingand Unlocking (page 36).

O

209

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio unit overview

Page 212: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 212/266

Sound button.  See Soundbutton (page 216).

P

Menu entry/exit.Q

Phone menu.  See Telephone(page 229).

R

Auxiliary, USB and iPod select.See Auxiliary Power Points(page 79).  See Auxiliary inputjack (page 226).

S

Radio and waveband select.  SeeAudio unit operation (page216).

T

CD eject.  See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).U

CD select.  See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).

V

Function buttons 1 to 4 are contextdependent, and change according to thecurrent unit mode. Descriptions for thefunctions are shown at the bottom of thescreen display.

Type 5

Descriptions for function buttons1-4

A

210

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio unit overview

Page 213: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 213/266

Function 1.A

Function 2.B

Seek down. CD track selection.See Station tuning control(page 216).  See Track selection(page 221).

C

On/off and volume control.D

Seek up. CD track selection.  SeeStation tuning control (page216).  See Track selection (page221).

E

Function 3.F

Function 4.G

Menu select.H

Telephone keypad, stationpresets and navigation keypad.See Using the telephone (page231).  See Station presetbuttons (page 217).  SeeNavigation Quick start (page193).

I

Clock.JTraffic announcement.  SeeTraffic information control(page 218).

K

Navigation arrows.L

Map.M

Information.N

Door lock indicator.O

211

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio unit overview

Page 214: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 214/266

Hazard warning flasher switch.P

Door lock button.  See Lockingand Unlocking (page 36).

Q

Navigation.R

Menu entry/exit.S

Phone menu.  See Telephone(page 229).

T

Auxiliary, USB and iPod select.See Auxiliary Power Points(page 79).  See Auxiliary inputjack (page 226).

U

Radio and waveband select.  See

Audio unit operation (page216).

V

CD eject.  See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).

W

CD select.  See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).

X

Function buttons 1 to 4 are contextdependent, and change according to thecurrent unit mode. Descriptions for the

functions are shown at the bottom of thescreen display.

212

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio unit overview

Page 215: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 215/266

SECURITY CODE

Each unit incorporates a unique code thatis needed to activate the audio systemwhen the vehicle battery has beendisconnected and reconnected. The 4 digitcode is included in the owner informationpack.

If the security code is not available, pleasesee your dealer.

Entering a security code

If ‘CODE - - - -’, ‘CODE 0000’ or ‘EnterKeycode’ appears in the display when you

switch on the audio unit, you must enterthe Keycode using the station presetbuttons.

Type 0, 1 and 2

1. Press button 1 repeatedly until the firstdigit of your Keycode is shown in thedisplay.

2. Press preset buttons 2, 3 and 4 in thesame way for remaining three digits.

3. Make sure that the complete Keycodeis correct before pressing preset button5 to confirm it except 1500RDS pressthe AM/FM button.

Type 3, 4 and 5

1. Press the numbered buttoncorresponding to the first digit of yourKeycode.

2. Press the numbered button

corresponding to the second digit ofyour Keycode. Repeat for digits 3 and4 in the same way.

3. If you make a mistake entering thecode, you may re-enter the digits bycontinuing to select buttons 0-9. Thedisplay will advance from digit position1 to 4 and then back again.

4. Make sure that the complete Keycodeis correct before pressing either the *preset button or the button betweenthe arrow buttons to confirm it.

213

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio System Security 

Page 216: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 216/266

SETTING THE CLOCK ON THEAUDIO UNIT

Changing the timeThe clock can be set at any time when thesystem is in the one hour mode or theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Note: Type 2 and 3: The time can be adjusted using the hour and minute buttonson the screen.

To advance the hours, press the HOUR SETbutton. To advance the minutes, press theMINUTE SET button while the time is

flashing.

Note: Type 5: The time can be adjusted using the clock button on the audio control panel. See Audio unit overview (page 205).

Note: The time can be adjusted using the navigation arrow buttons on the audiocontrol panel.

Type 0 and 1

• Press the MENU button.

• Rotate the MENU CONTROL to selectthe date/time.

• Short press the MENU button to enterdate/time.

• Rotate the MENU CONTROL to selectthe hour set and enter.

• Rotate the MENU CONTROL to adjustthe hours.

• Press BACK button to return toprevious menu.

• Rotate the MENU CONTROL to selectminute set and enter.

• Rotate the MENU CONTROL to adjustminutes.

• Press MENU button to save the newsettings.

Type 2, 4 and 5

• Press the MENU button.

• Use the UP and DOWN arrow buttons

to select the clock settings.• Press OK or RIGHT arrow button to

enter clock settings.

• Use UP and DOWN arrow button toselect the set time.

• Use UP and DOWN arrow buttons toadjust hours.

• Use RIGHT and LEFT arrow buttons toscroll to the minutes.

• Use UP and DOWN arrow buttons to

adjust minutes.

• Press OK button to save the newsettings

Type 3

• Press the MENU button.

• Use the UP and DOWN arrow buttonsto select the clock.

• Press OK or RIGHT arrow button toenter clock menu.

• Use UP and DOWN arrow button toselect the set time.

• Use UP and DOWN arrow buttons toadjust hours.

• Use RIGHT and LEFT arrow buttons toscroll to the minutes.

• Use UP and DOWN arrow buttons toadjust minutes.

• Press OK button to save the newsettings

Exact hour adjustment

You can set the time to the beginning ofan hour using this feature.

• Press the CLOCK button for about twoseconds until a beep is heard. Theclock's current time will flash.

• Press the CLOCK button again and thetime will be adjusted as follows:

214

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio Unit Clock and Date Displays

Page 217: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 217/266

Example

• current set time between 12:01 and12:29 will change to 12:00 exactly

• current set time between 12:30 and12:59 will change to 1:00 exactly.

Note: If the power supply to the unit isinterrupted (if the fuse blows or the vehicle's battery is disconnected), the clock will need to be reset.

215

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio Unit Clock and Date Displays

Page 218: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 218/266

ON/OFF CONTROL

Press the on/off control. This will alsooperate the unit for up to one hour with theignition turned off.

The radio will switch off automaticallyafter one hour.

SOUND BUTTON

This will allow you to adjust the soundsettings (for example bass and treble).

1. Press the sound button.

2. Use the up and down arrow buttons toselect the required setting.

3. Use the left and right arrow buttons tomake the necessary adjustment. Thedisplay indicates the level selected.

4. Press the OK button to confirm thenew settings.

WAVEBAND BUTTON

Press the RADIO button to select from thewavebands available.

The selector can also be used to return toradio reception when you have beenlistening to another source.

Alternatively, press the left arrow buttonto display the available wavebands. Scrollto the required waveband and press OK.

STATION TUNING CONTROLSeek tuning

Select a waveband and briefly press oneof the seek buttons. The unit will stop atthe first station it finds in the direction youhave chosen.

Manual tuning

Type 0 and 1

1. Make sure FM/AM mode is active andthen MANUAL TUNE.

2. Use the seek buttons to tune down orup the waveband in small incrementsor press and hold to increment quickly,until you find a station you want tolisten to.

Type 2

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Select RADIO mode and then MANUALTUNE.

3. Use the left and right arrow buttons totune down or up the waveband in smallincrements or press and hold toincrement quickly, until you find astation you want to listen to.

4. Press OK to continue listening to astation.

Type 3, 4 and 5

1. Press function button 2.

2. Use the left and right arrow buttons totune down or up the waveband in smallincrements or press and hold toincrement quickly, until you find astation you want to listen to.

3. Press OK to continue listening to astation.

Scan tuning

Scan allows you to listen to 8 seconds ofeach station detected.

Type 0 and 1

1. Press the FM/AM button.

2. Short press the SCAN/AS button, theradio will automatically scan up theselected waveband.

216

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio unit operation

Page 219: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 219/266

3. Short press the SCAN/AS button againto continue listening to a station.

Type 2

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Select RADIO mode and then SCAN.

3. Use the seek buttons to scan up ordown the selected waveband.

4. Press OK to continue listening to astation.

Type 3, 4 and 5

1. Press function button 3.

2. Use the seek buttons to scan up ordown the selected waveband.

3. Press function button 3 again or OK tocontinue listening to a station.

STATION PRESET BUTTONS

This feature allows you to store yourfavorite stations so that they can berecalled by selecting the appropriate

waveband and pressing one of the presetbuttons.

Type 0 and 1

1. Select a waveband.

2. Tune to the station required.

3. Press and hold one of the presetbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenthe station has been stored, the presetnumber along with the station name

or frequency is displayed forconfirmation.

Type 2, 3, 4 and 5

1. Select a waveband.

2. Tune to the station required.

3. Press and hold one of the presetbuttons. A progress bar and messagewill appear. When the progress barcompletes the station has been stored.

The audio unit will also mutemomentarily as confirmation.

This can be repeated on each wavebandand for each preset button.

Note: When you drive to another part of thecountry, FM stations that broadcast on alternative frequencies, and are stored on preset buttons, may be updated with thecorrect frequency and station name for that area.

AUTOSTORE CONTROL

Note: This will store the strongest signals available, either from the AM or the FMwaveband, and overwrite the previously  stored stations. It can also be used to store stations manually in the same way as other wavebands.

Type 0 and 11. In RADIO mode, long press the

SCAN/AS button.

2. When the search is complete, sound isrestored and the strongest 6 stationsare stored on the Autostore presets.

Type 2, 3, 4 and 5

1. Press and hold function button 1 or theRADIO button.

2. When the search is complete, sound isrestored and the strongest 10 stationsare stored on the Autostore presets.

217

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio unit operation

Page 220: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 220/266

TRAFFIC INFORMATIONCONTROL

Many stations that broadcast on the FMwaveband have a TP code to signify thatthey carry traffic program information.

Activating traffic announcements

Before you can receive trafficannouncements, you must press either theTA or TRAFFIC button. A ‘TA’ display willappear to show the feature is switched on.

If you are already tuned to a station that

broadcasts traffic information,‘TP

’ willalso be displayed. Otherwise the unit will

search for a traffic program.

When traffic information is broadcast, itwill automatically interrupt normal radioor CD playback and ‘Traffic announcement(TA)’ will appear in the display.

If a non-traffic station is selected orrecalled using a preset button, the audiounit will remain on that station unless TAor TRAFFIC is turned off, then on again.

Note: If TA is on and you select a preset or  manual tune to a non TA station no traffic announcement will be heard.

Note: When you are listening to a non TA station and turn TA off and on again a TP seek will occur.

Traffic announcement volume

Traffic announcements interrupt normalbroadcasts at a preset minimum level thatis usually louder than normal listeningvolumes.

To adjust the preset volume:

• Use the volume control to make thenecessary adjustment during anincoming TA broadcast. The displaywill show the level selected.

Ending traffic announcements

The audio unit will return to normaloperation at the end of each traffic

announcement. To end the announcementprematurely, press TA or TRAFFIC duringthe announcement.

Note: If you press TA or TRAFFIC at any other time it will switch all announcementsoff.

218

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio unit operation

Page 221: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 221/266

AUTOMATIC VOLUMECONTROL

When available, automatic volume control(AVC) adjusts the volume level tocompensate for engine noise and roadspeed noise.

1. Press the MENU button and selectAUDIO.

2. Select AVC LEVEL or ADAPTIVE VOL.

3. Use the left or right arrow button toadjust the setting.

4. Press the OK button to confirm your

selection.5. Press the MENU button to return.

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING(DSP)

DSP occupancy 

This feature takes into account thedifferences in distance from the various

speakers in the vehicle to each seat. Selectthe sitting position for which the audio isto be correctly enhanced.

DSP equalizer

Select the music category that most suitsyour listening preference. The audio outputwill change to enhance the particular styleof music chosen.

Changing the DSP settings

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS.

3. Scroll to the required DSP function.

4. Use the up and down arrow buttons toselect the required setting.

5. Press the OK button to confirm yourselection.

6. Press the MENU button to return.

NEWS BROADCASTS

Some audio units interrupt normalreception to broadcast news bulletins fromstations on the FM waveband or radio datasystem (RDS) and enhanced othernetwork (EON) linked stations, in the sameway as traffic information is provided.

During news broadcasts, the display willindicate there is an incomingannouncement. News interrupts arebroadcast at the same preset volume levelas traffic announcements.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS.

3. Scroll to NEWS and turn on or off withthe OK button.

4. Press the MENU button to return.

ALTERNATIVE FREQUENCIES

Many programs that broadcast on the FMwaveband have a program identification

(PI) code, which can be recognized byaudio units.

If your radio has alternative frequencies(AF) tuning switched on and you movefrom one transmission area to another, thisfacility will search for and switch to astronger station signal, if one can be found.

Under certain conditions, however, AFtuning may temporarily disrupt normalreception.

When selected, the unit continuallyevaluates signal strength and, if a bettersignal becomes available, the unit willswitch to that alternative. It mutes whileit checks a list of alternative frequenciesand, if necessary, it will search once acrossthe selected waveband for a genuinealternative frequency.

219

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio unit menus

Page 222: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 222/266

It will restore radio reception when it findsone or, if one is not found, the unit willreturn to the original stored frequency.

When selected,‘AF

’ will be shown in thedisplay.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO MENU.

3. Scroll to ALTERNAT FREQ. orALTERNATIVE FREQ. and turn on or offwith the OK button.

4. Press the MENU button to return.

REGIONAL MODE (REG)Regional mode (REG) controls thebehavior of AF switching betweenregionally related networks of a parentbroadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairlylarge network across a large part of thecountry. At various times of the day thislarge network may be broken down into anumber of smaller regional networks,typically centered on major towns or cities.When the network is not split into regionalvariants, the whole network caries thesame programming.

Regional mode ON: This prevents 'random'AF switches when neighboring regionalnetworks are not carrying the sameprogramming.

Regional mode OFF: This allows a largercoverage area if neighboring regionalnetworks are carrying the sameprogramming, but can cause 'random' AF

switches if they are not.1. Press the MENU button.

2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS.

3. Scroll to RDS REGIONAL and turn onor off with the OK button.

4. Press the MENU button to return.

220

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio unit menus

Page 223: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 223/266

COMPACT DISC PLAYBACK

Note: During playback, the display indicatesthe disc, track and time that has elapsed  since the start of the track.

During radio reception, press the CD buttononce to start CD playback.

Playback will start immediately after a discis loaded.

TRACK SELECTION

• Press the seek up button once to move

to the next track or press it repeatedlyto access later tracks.

• Press the seek down button once toreplay the current track. If pressedwithin two seconds of the start of atrack, the previous track will beselected.

• Press the seek down button repeatedlyto select previous tracks.

Type 2, 3, 4 and 5

• Press the up or down arrow buttons,and using the OK button, select therequired track.

Type 3, 4 and 5

The desired track number may be enteredusing the numeric keypad. Dial the requiredtrack number until complete (for example1 then 2 for track 12), or dial the numberand directly press OK.

FAST FORWARD/REVERSE

Press and hold the seek down or upbuttons to search backwards or forwardswithin the tracks on the disc.

SHUFFLE/RANDOM

Random track playback, also known asshuffle, plays all tracks on the CD inrandom order.

Type 1

1. Press the SHUFFLE button in CD mode.

When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude SHUFFLE for the whole CD, or toplay all the tracks in the folder in a randomorder.

Type 2

1. Press the MENU button and select CDMODE.

2. Select SHUFFLE, which then enablesthe function to be selected on or off.

When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude SHUFFLE for the whole CD, or toplay all the tracks in the folder in a randomorder.

Type 3, 4 and 5

Press function button 2.

Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude SHUFFLE for the whole CD, or to play all the tracks in the folder in a randomorder. Repeat presses of function button 2will toggle these options.

Use the seek up or down button to selectthe next track to shuffle if required.

REPEAT COMPACT DISCTRACKS

Type 1

1. Press REPEAT button in CD mode.

When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude REPEAT for the track, or to repeatall the tracks in the folder.

221

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Compact Disc Player

Page 224: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 224/266

Type 2

1. Press the MENU button and select CDMODE.

2. Select REPEAT, which then enablesthe function to be selected on or off.The track will replay once ended.

When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude REPEAT for the track, or to repeatall the tracks in the folder.

Type 3, 4 and 5

Press function button 1.

When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude REPEAT for the track, or to repeatall the tracks in the folder. Repeat pressesof function button 1 will toggle theseoptions.

COMPACT DISC TRACKSCANNING

The SCAN function allows you to previeweach track for approximately 8 seconds.

Type 1

1. Press CD/AUX to select CD MODE.

2. Short press SCAN/AS button toactivate CD scanning.

3. Short press the SCAN/AS button againto continue listening to a track.

Type 2

Various scan modes are possible,according to the type of CD currentlyplaying.

1. Press the MENU button and select CDMODE.

2. Select SCAN, which then enables thefunction to be selected on or off.

Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude SCAN for the CD, or just the tracksin the folder.

3. Press the OK button to stop the scanmode.

Type 3, 4 and 5

1. Press function button 3.

Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude SCAN for the CD, or just the tracksin the folder. Repeat presses of function button 3 will toggle these options.

2. Press function button 3 again to stop

the scan mode.

MP3 FILE PLAYBACK

MP3 (MPEG 1 Audio Layer-3) is a standardtechnology and format for compressingaudio data. This allows a more efficientuse of the media.

You can play MP3 files recorded onCD-ROMs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs. The disc

must be in the ISO 9660 level 1 or level 2format, or Joliet or Romeo in the expansionformat. You can also use a disc recordedin Multi Session.

ISO 9660 format

This is the most common internationalstandard for the logical format of files andfolders on a CD-ROM.

There are several specification levels. InLevel 1, file names must be in the 8.3format (no more than 8 characters in thename, no more than 3 characters in theextension “.MP3”) and in capital letters.

Folder names can be no longer than 8characters. There can be no more than 8folder levels (trees). Level 2 specificationsallow file names up to 31 characters long.

Each folder can have up to 8 trees.

222

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Compact Disc Player

Page 225: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 225/266

For Joliet or Romeo in the expansionformat, please consider these restrictionswhen configuring your CD writing software.

Multi sessionThis is a recording method that enablesadding of data using the Track-At-Oncemethod.

Conventional CDs begin at a CD controlarea called the Lead-in and end at an areacalled Lead-out. A Multi Session CD is aCD having multiple sessions, with eachsegment from Lead-in to Lead-outregarded as a single session.

• CD-Extra: The format that recordsaudio (audio CD data) as tracks onsession 1, and records data as trackson session 2.

• Mixed CD: In this format, data isrecorded as track 1, and audio (audioCD data) is recorded as track 2.

File formats

• With formats other than ISO 9660

level 1 and level 2, folder names or filenames may not be displayed correctly.

• When naming, be sure to add the fileextension “.MP3” to the file name.

• If you put the extension “.MP3” to a fileother than MP3, the unit cannotrecognize the file properly and willgenerate random noise that coulddamage your speakers.

• The following discs take a longer time

to start playback.• a disc recorded with complicated

tree structure.

• a disc recorded in Multi Session.

• a non-finalized disc to which datacan be added.

Playing a multi session disc

When the first track of the first sessionis audio CD data

Only audio CD data of the first session isplayed back. Non-audio CD data/MP3 fileinformation (track number, time, etc.) isdisplayed with no sound.

When the first track of the first sessionis not audio CD data

• If an MP3 file is in the disc, only MP3file(s) play back and other data isskipped. (Audio CD data is notrecognized.)

• If no MP3 file is in the disc, nothing isplayed back. (Audio CD data is notrecognized.)

MP3 files playback order

The playback order of the folders and filesis as shown.

Note: A folder that does not include an MP3file is skipped.

Playback tip: To specify a desiredplayback order, before the folder or filename, input the order by number (e.g.,“01,”“02”), then record contents onto a disc.(The order differs depending on the writingsoftware.)

223

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Compact Disc Player

Page 226: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 226/266

ID3 Tag Version 2

The following occurs when an MP3 filecontaining ID3 tag ver.2 is played:

• When skipping a portion of ID3 tag ver.2(at the beginning of the track), soundis not output. Skip time changesdepending ID3 tag ver.2 capacity.Example: At 64 kbytes, it is about 2seconds (with RealJukebox).

• The displayed elapsed playing timewhen skipping a portion of ID3 tag ver.2is inaccurate. For MP3 files of a bit rateother than 128 kbps, time is notdisplayed accurately during playback.

• When an MP3 file is created with MP3conversion software (e.g. RealJukebox

- a registered trademark ofRealNetworks Inc), ID3 ver.2 willautomatically be written.

MP3 navigation

MP3 tracks may be recorded on the CD inseveral ways. They can all be placed in the

root directory like a conventional audio CD,or they can be placed in folders that mayrepresent, for example, an album, an artist,or a genre.

The normal playing sequence on CDs withmultiple folders is to play the tracks withinthe root (top level) first, then the tracks inany folder(s) within the root, then moveonto the second folder, and so forth.

• Press the up or down arrow buttons to

enter the track list.• Navigate the hierarchy using the arrow

buttons to select another folder ortrack (file).

• Press OK to select a highlighted track.

MP3 DISPLAY OPTIONS

Note: Type 1 units may require repeated  button presses of the INFO button to display 

 all the available track information.When an MP3 disc is playing, certaininformation encoded in each track can bedisplayed. Such information will normallyinclude:

• The file name

• The folder name

• ID3 information which might be thealbum or artist’s name

The unit will normally show the file namethat is playing. To select one of the otheritems of information:

• Press the INFO button.

CD text display options

When an audio disc with CD text is playing,limited information encoded in each trackcan be displayed. Such information willnormally include:

224

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Compact Disc Player

Page 227: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 227/266

• The disc name

• The artist name

• The track name

These display options are selected in thesame way as MP3 displays.

ENDING COMPACT DISCPLAYBACK

To restore radio reception on all units:

• Press the RADIO button.

Note: This will not eject the CD; the disc

will merely pause at the point where radio reception was restored.

To resume CD playback, press the CDbutton again.

225

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Compact Disc Player

Page 228: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 228/266

Note: For optimum performance whenusing any auxiliary device set the volume onthe device high. This will reduce audiointerference when charging the device via

the vehicle power supply socket.

When fitted the Auxiliary input (AUX IN)socket permits an auxiliary device, such asan MP3 player, to be linked into the vehicleaudio system. Output can be playedthrough the vehicle speakers.

To connect an auxiliary device, plug it intothe AUX IN socket using a 3.5 mmconventional audio jack connector.

Select the auxiliary input via the AUX orMENU button and playback will be heardthrough the vehicle speakers. LINE IN orLINE IN ACTIVE will appear in the vehicleaudio unit display. Volume, treble and basscan be adjusted on the vehicle audio unitas normal.

The vehicle audio unit buttons can also beused to restore playback from the vehicleaudio unit, while the auxiliary deviceremains connected.

226

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Auxiliary input jack

Page 229: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 229/266

ANTENNA

The radio aerial is mounted on the roof ofthe vehicle above the interior rear viewmirror. It is fixed and cannot be raised andlowered, however the assembly can beremoved by unscrewing from the base.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the aerial,remove it before entering a car washor passing beneath a low overhead

clearance.

227

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio system care

Page 230: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 230/266

AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING

RectificationAudio unit display 

General error message for CD fault conditions, such ascannot read the CD, data-CD inserted, etc. Ensure discis loaded correct way up. Clean and re-try, or replace

disc with known music disc. If error persists contact yourdealer.

PLEASE CHECK CD

General error message for CD fault conditions such aspossible mechanism fault.

CD DRIVE MALFUNCTION

Ambient temperature too hot – unit will not work untilit has cooled down.

CD DRIVE HIGH TEMP

General error message for iPod fault conditions, suchas cannot read the data. Ensure iPod is inserted

correctly. If error persists contact your dealer.

IPOD ERROR READING DEVICE

228

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Audio Troubleshooting

Page 231: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 231/266

GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTION

Using the system with the engine offwill drain the battery.

This section describes the functions andfeatures of the Bluetooth cell phone handsfree system.

The Bluetooth cell phone part of thesystem provides interaction with the audioor navigation system and your cell phone.It allows you to use the audio or navigation

system to make and receive calls withouthaving to hold your cell phone.

Compatibility of phones

CAUTION

As no common agreement exists, cellphone manufacturers are able toimplement a variety of profiles in their

Bluetooth devices. Because of this, anincompatibility can occur between the

phone and hands-free system, which insome cases may significantly degrade thesystem performance. To avoid thissituation, only recommended phonesshould be used.

Please visit the website www.ford-mobile-connectivity.com for full details.

TELEPHONE SETUP

PhonebookAfter start up access to the phonebook listcan be delayed for several minutes,depending upon the size.

Phonebook categories

Depending on your phonebook entry,different categories can be displayed inthe audio unit.

For example:

MobileM

OfficeO

HomeH

FaxF

Note: Entries may be displayed without acategory attachment.

The category can also be indicated as anicon:

Phone

Mobile

Home

Office

Fax

Making a phone an active phone

When using the system for the first time,no phone is connected to the system.

Bluetooth phone

After bonding a Bluetooth phone to thesystem, this becomes the active phone.For further information refer to the phonemenu.

Select the phone from the active phonemenu.

Turning the ignition and radio or navigationunit back on again, the last active phoneis picked up by the system.

229

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Telephone

Page 232: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 232/266

Note: In some cases the Bluetoothconnection must also be confirmed on the phone.

Bond another Bluetooth phoneBond a new Bluetooth phone as describedin the requirements for a Bluetoothconnection.

Phones stored in the system are accessibleby using the phone list on the audio unit.

Note: A maximum of six devices may be bonded. If six Bluetooth devices have already been bonded, one of these has to be debonded in order to bond a new device.

BLUETOOTH SETUP

Before you can use your telephone withyour vehicle it must be bonded to thevehicle telephone system.

Handling of phones

Up to six Bluetooth devices can be bondedto the vehicle system.

Note: If there is an ongoing call when the phone in use is selected as the new active phone, the call is transferred to the vehicle audio system.

Note: Even if connected to the car system, your phone can still be used in the usualway.

Requirements for Bluetoothconnection

The following are required before aBluetooth phone connection can be made.

1. The Bluetooth feature must beactivated on the phone and on theaudio unit. Make sure the Bluetoothmenu option in the audio unit is set to

ON. For information on phone settings,refer to your phone user guide.

2. In the Bluetooth menu on your phone,search for Ford Audio and select it.

3. Enter the code number shown on thevehicle display using the phone keypad.If no code number is shown on thedisplay, enter the Bluetooth PINnumber 0000 using the phone keypad.Now enter the Bluetooth PIN number

shown on the vehicle display.4. If your cell phone asks you to authorize

the automatic connection, select YES.

Note: A phone call will be disconnected if the audio unit is switched off. If the ignition key is turned to the off position the phonecall will remain in progress.

230

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Telephone

Page 233: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 233/266

TELEPHONE CONTROLS

Remote control

Accept and reject call button

Reject callA

Accept callB

Incoming calls can be accepted by pressingthe answer call button once. Press thereject call button to end the call or to rejectthe incoming call.

USING THE TELEPHONE

Note: You can exit the phone menu by  pressing any source button CD , RADIO or  AUX  .

Note: When referred to, the use of the seekup and seek down buttons can be used oneither the steering wheel or the audio unit.

This chapter describes the phone functionsof the audio unit.

An active phone must be present.

Even if connected to the audio unit, yourphone can still be used in the usual way.

Making a call

Dialing a number using voice control

Phone numbers can be dialed using voicecontrol.  See Telephone commands(page 243).

Dialing a number using the addressbook

You can access your phone address bookvia Bluetooth. The entries will appear inthe unit display.

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the up/down arrow buttons untilPHONEBOOK is shown.

3. Press the OK button.

Note: You can also use the telephone keypad to select the first letter of the entry  you are looking for. Press the relevant number that corresponds to the letter  repeatedly until the required letter isdisplayed.

4. Press the up/down arrow buttons to

select the desired phone number.Note: Press and hold the up/down arrow  buttons to search forwards or backwardswithin the phonebook.

5. Press the OK button to dial theselected phone number.

Dialing a number using the telephonekeypad

If you have an audio unit with a telephone

keypad (buttons 0-9, * and #):1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the up/down arrow buttons untilDIAL NUMBER is shown.

3. Press the OK button.

4. Dial the number using the telephonekeypad on the audio unit.

5. Press the OK button.

231

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Telephone

Page 234: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 234/266

Note: If you enter an incorrect digit whilstentering a phone number, press function button 3 to erase the last digit. A long presswill erase the complete string of digits.

Press and hold 0 to enter a + digit.

Ending a call

Calls can be ended by:

• Pressing the reject call button.

• Pressing the OK button.

• Pressing function button 4.

Redialing a number

1. Press the PHONE or the answer callbutton.

2. Press the up/down arrow buttons untilCALL LISTS is displayed.

3. Press the OK button.

Note: If the active phone does not provide a call out list, the last outgoing call number/entry can be redialed.

4. Press the up/down buttons to select

the desired call list.5. Press the OK button.

6. Press the up/down buttons to selectthe desired phone number.

7. Press the OK button.

Redialing the last dialed number

1. Press the PHONE or the answer callbutton.

2. Press the up/down arrow buttons until

REDIAL is displayed.

3. Press the OK button.

Receiving an incoming call

Accepting an incoming call

Incoming calls can be accepted by pressingthe answer call button, or by pressing theOK button.

Rejecting an incoming call

Incoming calls can be rejected by:

• Pressing the reject call button, or

• Pressing the arrow down button tohighlight REJECT and then pressingthe OK button.

Receiving a second incoming call

Note: The second incoming call function must be activated in your phone.

If there is an incoming call whilst there isan ongoing call, a beep will be heard andyou will have the option to end the active

call and to accept the incoming call.

Accepting a second incoming call

Note: The first incoming call will bedisconnected and replaced by the second incoming call.

Second incoming calls can be acceptedby pressing the answer call button on thesteering wheel, the PHONE button, or bypressing the OK button on the audio unit.

Rejecting a second incoming call

Second incoming calls can be rejected by:

• Pressing the reject call button.

• Pressing the arrow down button tohighlight REJECT and then pressingthe OK button.

• Pressing function button 4.

Muting the microphone

Note: During a call, it is possible to mutethe microphone. Whilst muted, confirmationwill appear in the display.

Press function button 1. Press the buttononce again to turn this function off.

Changing the active phone

Note: Phones must be bonded to the system before they can be made active.

232

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Telephone

Page 235: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 235/266

Note: After bonding a phone to the system,this becomes the active phone.

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the up/down buttons untilSELECT PHONE is shown.

3. Press the OK button.

4. Scroll through the different storedphones by using the up/down buttonsto display the bonded phones.

5. Press the OK button to select thephone which is to be the active phone.

Debonding a bonded phone

A bonded phone can be deleted from thesystem at any time, unless a phone call isin progress.

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the up/down buttons untilSELECT PHONE is shown.

3. Press the OK button.

4. Press the up/down buttons to highlightthe required phone.

5. Press function button 1.

233

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Telephone

Page 236: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 236/266

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

CAUTION

Using the system with the engine offwill drain the battery.

Voice recognition enables operation of thesystem without the need to divert yourattention from the road ahead in order tochange settings, or receive feedback fromthe system.

Whenever you issue one of the definedcommands with the system active, the

voice recognition system converts yourcommand into a control signal for thesystem. Your inputs take the form ofdialogues or commands. You are guidedthrough these dialogues byannouncements or questions.

Please familiarize yourself with thefunctions of the system before using voicerecognition.

Supported commands

The voice control system allows you tocontrol the following vehicle functions:

• Bluetooth phone

• radio

• CD Player

• external device (USB)

• external device (iPod)

• external device (Line in)

• external device (Bluetooth)

• automatic climate control

System response

As you work through a voice session thesystem will prompt you with a beep toneeach time the system is ready to proceed.

Do not try to give any commands until thebeep tone has been heard. The voicecontrol system will repeat each spokencommand back to you.

If you are not sure how to continue say"HELP" for assistance or "CANCEL" if youdo not wish to continue.

The "HELP" function provides only asubset of the available voice commands.Detailed explanations of all possible voicecommands can be found on the followingpages.

Voice commands

All voice commands should be given usinga natural speaking voice, as if speaking toa passenger or on the phone. Your voicelevel should be dependant on thesurrounding noise level inside or outsidethe vehicle but do not shout.

USING VOICE CONTROL

System operation

The order and content of the voice controlsare given in the following lists. The tablesshow the sequence of user voicecommands and system responses for eachavailable function.

<> indicates a number or stored name tagto be inserted by the user.

Short cuts

There are a number of voice command

short cuts available, which allow you tocontrol some vehicle features withouthaving to follow the complete commandmenu. These are:

• phone: "MOBILE NAME", "DIALNUMBER", "DIAL NAME", and "REDIAL"

• CD player/CD changer: "DISC" and"TRACK"

234

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Voice control

Page 237: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 237/266

• automatic climate control:"TEMPERATURE", "AUTO MODE","DEFROSTING/DEMISTING ON" and"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING OFF"

• radio: "TUNE NAME"

• external device (USB): "TRACK"

• external device (iPod): "TRACK"

Start communicating with the system

Before you can start talking to the systemyou first have to press the VOICE buttonfor each operation and wait until thesystem answers with a beep.  See VoiceControl (page 40).

Press the button again to cancel the voicesession.

Name tag

The name tag functionality can supportthe phone, audio and navigation featuresby using the "STORE NAME" function. Youcan assign name tags to items such asfavorite radio stations and personal phonecontacts.  See Audio unit commands

(page 235).  See Telephone commands(page 243).

• Store up to 20 name tags per function.

• The average recording time for eachname tag is approximately 2-3

seconds.

AUDIO UNIT COMMANDS

CD Player

You can control playback directly by voicecontrol.

Overview

The overview below shows the available

voice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

"CD PLAYER"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE FOLDER"**

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT FOLDER"**

235

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Voice control

Page 238: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 238/266

"CD PLAYER"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3 or WMA.

Track

You can choose a track on your CD directly.

System answerUser saysSteps

"CD PLAYER""CD PLAYER"1

"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"*2

"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"**3

* Can be used as a shortcut.

** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)

Shuffle all

To set random playback.

System answerUser saysSteps

"CD PLAYER""CD PLAYER"1

"SHUFFLE ALL"2

RadioThe radio voice commands support thefunctionality of the radio and allow you totune radio stations by voice control.

Overview

The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu.

236

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Voice control

Page 239: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 239/266

"RADIO"

"HELP"

"AM"

"FM"

"TUNE NAME"*

"DELETE NAME"

"DELETE DIRECTORY"

"PLAY DIRECTORY"

"STORE NAME"

"PLAY"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Tune frequency 

This function allows you to tune your radioby voice commands.

System answerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"AM FREQUENCY PLEASE""AM"2

"FM FREQUENCY PLEASE""FM"

"TUNE <frequency>""<frequency>"*3

* The frequency may be entered in a variety of ways. Refer below for representativeexamples.

FM band: 87.5 - 108.0 in increments of 0.1

• "Eighty nine point nine" (89.9)

• "Ninety" (90.0)

• "One hundred point five" (100.5)

• "One zero one point one" (101.1)

• "One zero eight" (108.0)

AM/MW band: 531 - 1602 in increments of9

AM/LW band: 153 - 281 in increments of 1

• "Five thirty one" (531)

• "Nine hundred" (900)

• "Fourteen forty" (1440)

237

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Voice control

Page 240: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 240/266

• "Fifteen zero three" (1503)

• "Ten eighty" (1080)

Store name

If you have tuned a radio station, you canstore it with a name in the directory.

System answerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"STORE NAME""STORE NAME"2"NAME PLEASE"

"REPEAT NAME PLEASE""<name>"3

"STORING NAME""<name>"4"<name> STORED"

Tune name

This function allows you to call up a storedradio station.

System answerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"NAME PLEASE""TUNE NAME"*2

"TUNE <name>""<name>"3

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Delete name

This function allows you to delete a storedradio station.

System answerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"NAME PLEASE""DELETE NAME"2

"DELETE <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DELETED""YES"4

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

238

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Voice control

Page 241: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 241/266

Play directory  This function allows you to let the systemtell you all of the stored radio stations.

System answerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"PLAY <DIRECTORY>""PLAY DIRECTORY"2

Delete directory 

This function allows you to delete allstored radio stations at once.

System answerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"DELETE DIRECTORY""DELETE DIRECTORY"2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"RADIO DIRECTORY DELETED""YES"3

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

Play 

This function switches the audio source tothe radio mode.

System answerUser saysSteps

"RADIO""RADIO"1

"PLAY"2

Auxiliary inputThis function allows you to switch theaudio source to the attached auxiliary inputdevice.

System answerUser saysSteps

"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1

"LINE IN""LINE IN"2

239

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Voice control

Page 242: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 242/266

External devices - USB

These voice commands support thefunctionality of an external USB device

which may be connected to the audio unit.

Overview

The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists will

give further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "USB"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"PLAYLIST"**

"FOLDER"**

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE FOLDER"

"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT FOLDER"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

** Playlists and folders activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames.

USB play 

This function allows you to switch theaudio source to the attached USB device.

System answerUser saysSteps

"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1

"USB""USB"2

"PLAY"3

240

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Voice control

Page 243: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 243/266

USB Track You can choose a track on your USB devicedirectly.

System answerUser saysSteps

"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1

"USB""USB"2

"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"3

"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"*4

* Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)

External devices - iPod

These voice commands support thefunctionality of an iPod which may beconnected to the audio unit.

Overview

The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "IPOD"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"PLAYLIST"**

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

** Playlists activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames.

241

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Voice control

Page 244: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 244/266

iPod Track You can choose a track off the all titles listof your iPod directly.

System answerUser saysSteps

"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNALDEVICE"

1

"IPOD""IPOD"2

"TRACK NUMBERPLEASE"

"TRACK"*3

"TRACK <number>""<a numberbetween 1 and

99>"**

4

* Can be used as a shortcut.

** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to five single digits (for example "5", "2","4", "5", "3" for track 52453), to a limit of 65535.

iPod playlist

You can choose a playlist from your iPoddirectly.

System answerUser saysSteps

"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNALDEVICE"

1

"IPOD""IPOD"2

"PLAYLIST NUMBERPLEASE"

"PLAYLIST"*3

"PLAYLIST <number>""<a numberbetween 1 and 10>"

4

* Playlists activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames.

External devices - Bluetooth

These voice commands support thefunctionality of Bluetooth which may beconnected to the audio unit.

Overview

The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

242

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Voice control

Page 245: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 245/266

"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "BLUETOOTH"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT OFF"

TELEPHONE COMMANDS

Phone

Your phone system allows you to createan additional phonebook. The storedentries can be dialed by voice control.Phone numbers stored by using voicecontrol are stored on the vehicle systemand not in your phone.

Overview

The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

"PHONE"

"HELP"

"MOBILE NAME"*

"DIAL NUMBER"*

"DIAL NAME"*

"DELETE NAME"

"DELETE DIRECTORY"

"PLAY DIRECTORY"

"STORE NAME"

"REDIAL"*

243

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Voice control

Page 246: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 246/266

"PHONE"

"ACCEPT CALLS"

"REJECT CALLS"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Phone functions

Dial number

Phone numbers can be dialed after givingthe name tag voice command.

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"NUMBER PLEASE""DIAL NUMBER"*2

"<phone number>"<phone number>"3CONTINUE?"

"DIALLING""DIAL"4

"<repeat last part of number>"CORRECTION"

CONTINUE?"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Dial name

Phone numbers can be dialed after givingthe name tag voice command.

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1"NAME PLEASE""DIAL NAME"

*2

"DIAL <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DIALLING""YES"4

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

244

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Voice control

Page 247: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 247/266

Redial This function allows you to redial the lastdialed phone number.

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"REDIAL""REDIAL"*2

"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DIALLING""YES"3

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Mobile name

This function allows you to access phonenumbers stored with a name tag in yourmobile phone.

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"MOBILE NAME" "<phone

dependent dialogue>"

"MOBILE NAME"*2

* Can be used as a shortcut.

DTMF (Tone dialling)

This function transfers spoken numbersinto DTMF tones. For example, to make aremote enquiry to your home answeringmachine or to enter a PIN number etc.

Note: DTMF can only be used during anongoing call. Operate the VOICE button and wait for the system prompt.

Can only be used with vehicles installed with a dedicated VOICE button.

System answerUser saysSteps

"NUMBER PLEASE"1

"<numbers 1 to 9, zero, hash, star>"2

245

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Voice control

Page 248: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 248/266

Create a phonebook

Store name

New entries can be stored with the"STORE NAME" command. This featurecan be used to dial a number by calling upthe name instead of the full phone number.

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"STORE NAME""STORE NAME"2"NAME PLEASE"

"REPEAT NAME PLEASE""<name>"3

"STORING NAME""<name>"4"<name> STORED"

"NUMBER PLEASE"

"<phone number>""<phone number>"5

"STORING NUMBER""STORE"6"<phone number>""NUMBER STORED"

Delete name

Stored names can also be deleted from

the directory.

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"NAME PLEASE""DELETE NAME"2

"DELETE <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"<name> DELETED""YES"4

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

Play directory 

Use this function to let the system tell youall stored entries.

246

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Voice control

Page 249: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 249/266

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"PLAY DIRECTORY""PLAY DIRECTORY"2

Delete directory 

This function allows you to delete allentries in one go.

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"DELETE DIRECTORY""DELETE DIRECTORY"2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DIRECTORY DELETED""YES"3

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

Main settings

Reject calls

Calls can be set to be automaticallyrejected using voice control.

System answerUser saysSteps

"PHONE""PHONE"1

"REJECT CALLS""REJECT CALLS"2

"ACCEPT CALLS""ACCEPT CALLS"*

* use this command to turn the reject mode off

247

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Voice control

Page 250: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 250/266

CLIMATE CONTROLCOMMANDS

ClimateThe climate voice commands supports thefunctionality of the fan speed, temperatureand mode settings. Not all functions are

available on all vehicles.

Overview

The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

"CLIMATE"

"HELP"

"FAN"*

"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING ON"*

"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING OFF"*

"TEMPERATURE"*

"AUTO MODE"*

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Fan

This function allows you to adjust the fanspeed.

System answerUser saysSteps

"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"FAN SPEED PLEASE""‘FAN"*2

"FAN MINIMUM""MINIMUM"

3 "FAN <number>""<a number between 1 and 7>"

"FAN MAXIMUM""MAXIMUM"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

248

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Voice control

Page 251: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 251/266

Defrosting/Demisting

System answerUser saysSteps

"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING ON""DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING

ON"*

2"DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING

OFF"

"DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING

OFF"*

* Can be used as a shortcut.

TemperatureThis function allows you to adjust thetemperature.

System answerUser saysSteps

"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"TEMPERATURE PLEASE""TEMPERATURE"*2

"TEMPERATURE MINIMUM""MINIMUM"

3 "TEMPERATURE <number>""<a number between 15 and 29 °C

with 0.5 increments>" or "<anumber between 59 and 84 °F>"

"TEMPERATURE MAXIMUM""MAXIMUM"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Auto mode

System answerUser saysSteps

"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"AUTO MODE""AUTO MODE"*2

* Can be used as a shortcut. Can be deactivated by selecting a different temperature orfan speed.

249

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Voice control

Page 252: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 252/266

TYPE APPROVALS

FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

FCC ID: WJLRX-42

IC: 7847A-RX42

Changes or modifications to your devicenot expressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance can void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.

RX-42 - declaration of conformity 

We, the party responsible for compliance,declare under our sole responsibility thatthe Handset Integration product RX-42 isin conformity with the provisions of the

following Council Directive: 1999/5/EC. Acopy of the Declaration of Conformity canbe found at:

www.novero.com/declaration_of_conformity

The Bluetooth word mark and logos areowned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and anyuse of such marks by Ford Motor Companyis under license. Other trademarks andtrade names are those of their respectiveowners.

ELECTROMAGNETICCOMPATIBILITY

WARNINGSYour vehicle has been tested andcertified to legislations relating toelectromagnetic compatibility

(72/245/EEC, UN ECE Regulation 10 orother applicable local requirements). It isyour responsibility to ensure that anyequipment you have fitted complies withapplicable local legislations. Have anyequipment fitted by properly trainedtechnicians.

The RF (radio frequency) transmitterequipment (e.g. cellular telephones,amateur radio transmitters etc.) may

only be fitted to your vehicle if they complywith the parameters shown in the tablebelow. There are no special provisions orconditions for installations or use.

Do not mount any transceiver,microphones, speakers, or any otheritem in the deployment path of the

airbag system.Do not fasten antenna cables tooriginal vehicle wiring, fuel pipes andbrake pipes.

Keep antenna and power cables atleast 10 centimeters (4 inches) fromany electronic modules and airbags.

250

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Appendices

Page 253: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 253/266

Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (PeakRMS)

Frequency BandMHz

8100 W1 - 30

3, 4, 5100 W50 - 54

3, 4, 550 W68 – 87.5

3, 4, 550 W142–

 1763, 4, 550 W220 - 225

3, 4, 550 W380 – 512

3, 4, 5, 6*, 7

*10 W806 – 870

3, 4, 5, 6*, 7

*10 W870 - 940

3, 4, 510 W1200 – 1400

3, 4, 5, 6

*

, 7

*10 W1710 – 1885

3, 4, 5, 6*, 7

*10 W1885 – 2025

*Only for GSM/3G cellular phones, with a patch antenna installed inside of the front

windshield.

Note: Position 6 & 7 are patch antennas, 8is the towbar.

251

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Appendices

Page 254: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 254/266

Note: After the installation of RF transmitters, check for disturbances from and to all electrical equipment in thevehicle, both in the standby and transmit

 modes.

Check all electrical equipment:

• with the ignition ON

• with the engine running

• during a road test at various speeds.

Check that electromagnetic fieldsgenerated inside the vehicle cabin by thetransmitter installed do not exceedapplicable human exposure requirements.

252

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Appendices

Page 255: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 255/266

44WD

See: Four-Wheel Drive........................................97

AA/C

See: Climate Control...........................................65

About This Manual...........................................7Protecting the Environment................................7

ABSSee: Brakes...........................................................103

ABS driving hintsSee: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes................................................................103Accessories

See: Replacement Parts

Recommendation............................................10

Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................39Air Conditioning

See: Climate Control...........................................65

Air Vents............................................................65Alarm

See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................34

Alternative frequencies..............................219

Antenna...........................................................227Anti-Theft Alarm............................................34Alarm System........................................................34

Arming the Alarm.................................................35

Disarming the Alarm...........................................35

Full and Reduced Guard....................................35

Triggering the Alarm............................................35

Appendices....................................................250Approach Lamps............................................47Ashtray................................................................81At a Glance........................................................12

Audible Warnings and Indicators..............57Alarm warning.......................................................58

Direction indicator................................................57

Direction indicators warning.............................57

Door open warning...............................................57Home safe...............................................................57

Key in ignition warning.......................................58

Lights on warning.................................................57

Low fuel level warning........................................57

Low washer fluid warning.................................58

Missed lock warning...........................................58

Not in park warning..............................................57

One side park light...............................................57

Over speed warning............................................58

Parking brake warning........................................57

Restraints back-up warning.............................57Safety belt minder................................................57

Audio Control...................................................39Type 1........................................................................39

Type 2.......................................................................40

Audio introduction......................................204Audio system care........................................227Audio System Security................................213Audio troubleshooting...............................228Audio Troubleshooting..............................228Audio Unit Clock and Date

Displays.........................................................214Audio unit commands...............................235Auxiliary input.....................................................239

CD Player...............................................................235

External devices - Bluetooth.........................242

External devices - iPod.....................................241

External devices - USB....................................240

Radio......................................................................236

Audio unit menus.........................................219Audio unit operation....................................216Audio unit overview ...................................205Autolamps........................................................44

253

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Index

Page 256: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 256/266

Automatic Climate Control........................68Air distribution control.......................................68

Blower......................................................................68

Cooling the interior quickly...............................69

Recirculated air.....................................................69Switching off the automatic climate

control.................................................................70

Switching the air conditioning on and

off..........................................................................70

Temperature control...........................................69

Windshield defrosting and demisting..........70

Automatic Transmission.............................93Emergency Park Position Release

Lever....................................................................96

Hints on driving with an automatic

transmission.....................................................95Selector lever positions.....................................93

Sport Mode and Manual Shifting..................94

Automatic volume control........................219Autostore control..........................................217

Type 0 and 1...........................................................217

Type 2, 3, 4 and 5.................................................217

Autowipers........................................................41Auxiliary input jack......................................226Auxiliary Power Points..................................79

12 Volt DC Power Point.......................................79

Location...................................................................79

BBluetooth setup...........................................230

Handling of phones..........................................230

Requirements for Bluetooth

connection......................................................230

Bonnet LockSee: Opening and Closing the Hood...........150

Brake and Clutch Fluid Check.................160Brakes...............................................................103

Principle of Operation.......................................103

Breaking-In......................................................132Brakes and Clutch...............................................132

Engine......................................................................132

Tires..........................................................................132

Bulb Specification Chart...........................168

CCapacities and Specifications.................182

Car WashSee: Cleaning the Exterior................................172

Catalytic Converter.......................................88Driving with a Catalytic Converter.................88

Center Console...............................................80Changing a Bulb............................................162

Approach Lamp and Side Repeater...........164

Central High Mounted Brake Lamp.............167

Front Fog Lamps................................................164

Headlamp..............................................................163

Interior Lamp.......................................................166

License Plate Lamp...........................................165

Reading Lamp.....................................................166

Rear Lamps..........................................................164

Side Lamp and Direction Indicator..............163

Side Repeater......................................................163Changing a Fuse...........................................149Changing a Road Wheel.............................174

Installing a Road Wheel...................................179

Jacking and Lifting Points.................................177

Lug Nuts..................................................................174

Removing a Road Wheel..................................178

Spare Wheel..........................................................177

Stowing the Flat Tire.........................................180

Vehicle Jack...........................................................175

Vehicles with a Spare Wheel..........................174

Changing the 12V Battery...........................161Auxiliary Battery...................................................161

Main Battery..........................................................161

Changing the Wiper Blades.......................161Checking the Wiper Blades.......................161Child Safety.......................................................18Child Safety Locks..........................................23

Left-hand side.......................................................23

Right-hand side.....................................................23

Child Seat Positioning...................................21Cigar Lighter.....................................................79Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.........................173Cleaning the Exterior....................................172

Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts.......................172

Cleaning the Chrome Trim...............................172

Cleaning the Headlamps..................................172

Underbody.............................................................172

Using a Car Wash................................................172

254

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Index

Page 257: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 257/266

Cleaning the Interior.....................................172Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD Screens

and Radio Screens.........................................173

Rear Windows......................................................173

Safety Belts...........................................................172Climate Control..............................................65

Principle of Operation........................................65

Climate control commands....................248Climate..................................................................248

Clock....................................................................61Cold Weather Precautions........................132Compact disc playback..............................221Compact Disc Player...................................221Compact disc track scanning..................222

Type 1......................................................................222

Type 2.....................................................................222Type 3, 4 and 5....................................................222

Coolant CheckSee: Engine Coolant Check............................159

Cool Box.............................................................81Cruise Control.................................................40

Principle of Operation........................................116

Cruise controlSee: Using Cruise Control.................................116

Cup Holders.....................................................80

DData Recording..................................................9Daytime Running Lamps.............................45Diesel Particulate Filter...............................84

Regeneration.........................................................84

Digital signal processing (DSP)..............219Changing the DSP settings.............................219

DSP equalizer.......................................................219

DSP occupancy...................................................219

Direction Indicators........................................47DPF

See: Diesel Particulate Filter............................84

Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap........160Driver Airbag.....................................................27Driver Knee Airbag.........................................29Driving Hints....................................................132Driving Through Water................................133DRL

See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................45

EElectromagnetic compatibility...............250Electronic Locking Differential................102Ending compact disc playback..............225Engine Coolant Check................................159

Adding Engine Coolant.....................................159

Engine ImmobilizerSee: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................34

Engine Oil Check...........................................158Adding Oil..............................................................158

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi(Puma) Diesel/3.2L Duratorq-TDCi(Puma) Diesel............................................158

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.5L Duratec-HE

(122kW/165PS) - MI4..............................158Event Data Recording

See: Data Recording..............................................9

Exterior Mirrors.................................................51Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................52

Manual Folding and Unfolding.........................51

Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................51

FFastening the Safety Belts..........................24

Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy...........25Fast forward/reverse...................................221First Aid Kit......................................................135Floor Mats........................................................133Fog Lamps - Front

See: Front Fog Lamps........................................45

Fog Lamps - RearSee: Rear Fog Lamps..........................................46

Four-Wheel Drive...........................................97Principle of Operation.........................................97

Front Exterior Overview.................................12

Front Fog Lamps............................................45Adjustment.............................................................45

Control lever...........................................................45

Fuel and Refueling........................................86Technical Specifications....................................91

Fuel Consumption.........................................90Calculating Fuel Economy...............................90

Filling the Fuel Tank............................................90

Fuel ConsumptionSee: Technical Specifications..........................91

255

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Index

Page 258: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 258/266

Fuel Quality......................................................87Long-Term Storage..............................................87

Fuse Box Locations......................................138Auxiliary Fuse Box..............................................139

Engine Compartment Fuse Box....................138Passenger Compartment Fuse Box............138

Fuses.................................................................138Fuse Specification Chart...........................140

Auxiliary Fuse Box...............................................147

Engine Compartment Fuse Box...................140

Passenger Compartment Fuse Box............145

GGauges...............................................................53

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............53Fuel Gauge..............................................................53

Information Display.............................................53

Tachometer............................................................53

General Driving Points.................................132Vehicles with a diesel engine.........................132

General Information on RadioFrequencies....................................................31

Glasses Holder.................................................81Glove Box..........................................................80

Driver Side..............................................................80

Passenger Side.....................................................80

HHandbrake

See: Parking Brake.............................................103

Hazard Warning Flashers...........................135HDC

See: Using Hill Descent Control....................109

Headlamp Exit Delay....................................44Headlamp Leveling.......................................46Head Restraints..............................................76

Adjusting the head restraints...........................76

Removing the head restraints.........................76

Heated Seats...................................................78Heated Windows and Mirrors....................70

Heated Exterior Mirror..........................................71

Heated Rear Window..........................................70

Heated Windshield..............................................70

HeatingSee: Climate Control...........................................65

Hill Start Assist.............................................104Enable and Disable the System...................104

Switching the System On and Off...............105

Using Hill Start Assist.......................................104

Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes............................................................103

Hood LockSee: Opening and Closing the Hood...........150

IIgnition Switch.................................................82Important audio information..................204

Audio unit labels................................................204

Disc labels............................................................204

Information Displays.....................................59General Information............................................59

Installing Child Seats.....................................18Attaching a Child Seat with Top

Tethers................................................................20

Booster Seats.........................................................19

Child Seats for Different Mass Groups..........18

ISOFIX Anchor Points.........................................20

Top Tether Anchor Points.................................20

Instrument Cluster.........................................53Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................44

Instrument Panel Overview.........................15Interior Lamps..................................................47Courtesy lamp........................................................47

Reading lamps......................................................48

Interior Mirror...................................................50Auto-Dimming Mirror...........................................51

Introduction.........................................................7

JJump Starting the Vehicle.........................136

To Connect the Booster Cables.....................137

To Start the Engine.............................................137

KKeys and Remote Controls..........................31

256

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Index

Page 259: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 259/266

LLighting Control..............................................43

High Beams............................................................44

Parking Lamps......................................................43Lighting..............................................................43

General Information............................................43

Limited Slip Differential.............................102Load Carriers

See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............120

Load Carrying..................................................118General Information...........................................118

Loading the navigation data....................196Loading the navigation data..........................196

Load Retaining Fixtures...............................121

Load Rest...............................................................123Tie Down Points...................................................121

Locking and Unlocking.................................36Child play protection function.........................37

Driver configuration mode.................................37

Locking and unlocking the doors from

inside....................................................................37

Locking and unlocking the doors with the

key.........................................................................36

Locking and unlocking the doors with the

remote control.................................................36

Locking the doors individually with thekey.........................................................................38

Locks...................................................................36Luggage Covers..............................................118

Locking and lunlocking into positions.........118

Operation................................................................118

Lug NutsSee: Changing a Road Wheel.........................174

M

Maintenance..................................................150General Information..........................................150

Technical Specifications..................................169

Manual Climate Control..............................65Air distribution control.......................................65

Blower......................................................................66

Recirculated air.....................................................66

System settings....................................................66

Temperature control...........................................66

Manual Seats...................................................72Adjusting the Height of the Driver's

Seat.......................................................................73

Adjusting the Lumbar Support........................73

Folding the Seatback - Stretch cab...............74Moving the Seat Backward and

Forward...............................................................73

Recline Adjustment.............................................74

Manual Transmission...................................93Selecting Reverse Gear......................................93

Map updates.................................................203Message Center

See: Information Displays.................................59

MirrorsSee: Heated Windows and Mirrors................70

See: Windows and Mirrors................................49Mobile Communications

Equipment......................................................10MP3 display options...................................224

CD text display options....................................224

MP3 file playback.........................................222File formats..........................................................223

ID3 Tag Version 2................................................224

ISO 9660 format................................................222

MP3 files playback order.................................223

MP3 navigation...................................................224

Multi session........................................................223Playing a multi session disc...........................223

NNavigation introduction..............................191

General Information...........................................191

Navigation Quick start................................193Vehicles with SD navigation system...........193

Navigation system......................................200Navigation unit overview...........................194

Vehicles with SD navigation system...........195

News broadcasts..........................................219

OOil Check

See: Engine Oil Check.......................................158

On/off control................................................216Opening and Closing the Hood...............150

Closing the hood..................................................151

Opening the hood..............................................150

257

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Index

Page 260: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 260/266

PParking Aid........................................................111Parking Aids......................................................111

Principle of Operation.........................................111Parking Brake.................................................103Passenger Airbag...........................................28

.....................................................................................28

Fitting the Passenger Airbag Deactivation

Switch..................................................................28

Switching the Passenger Airbag Off.............28

Switching the Passenger Airbag On.............29

Passive Anti-Theft System.........................34Arming the Engine Immobilizer......................34

Coded Keys.............................................................34

Disarming the Engine Immobilizer.................34Principle of Operation........................................34

PATSSee: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................34

Personalized Settings...................................63Language setting..................................................63

Units of measure..................................................64

Power Door LocksSee: Locking and Unlocking.............................36

Power Seats......................................................74Adjusting the Height of the Driver's

Seat.......................................................................75Moving the Seat Backward and

Forward...............................................................75

Recline Adjustment.............................................75

Tilting the Seat......................................................76

Power Steering Fluid Check.....................159Adding Power Steering Fluid..........................159

Power Windows.............................................49Accessory Delay...................................................50

Bounce-Back.........................................................49

One-Touch Down.................................................49

One-Touch Up.......................................................49

Window Lock.........................................................49

RRear Axle..........................................................102Rear Exterior Overview..................................13Rear Fog Lamps.............................................46Rear Seat Armrest..........................................81

Rear Seats.........................................................76Folding the Seatback..........................................77

Folding the Seat Cushion...................................77

Unfolding the Seatback.....................................78

Unfolding the Seat Cushion..............................77Rear View Camera.........................................113

Switching the Rear View Camera Off..........115

Switching the Rear View Camera On...........113

Using the Display.................................................113

Rear View CameraSee: Rear View Camera.....................................113

Recommended Towing Weights............126Reduced Engine Performance.................132Refueling...........................................................88

Vehicles with Fuel Filler Cap............................88

Vehicles without Fuel Filler Cap.....................89Regional mode (REG)...............................220Remote Control................................................31

Changing the Remote Control Battery.........32

Programming a New Remote Control...........31

Programming the additional key.....................31

Remote Control With a Folding Key

Blade....................................................................32

Reprogramming the Unlocking

Function...............................................................31

Repairing Minor Paint Damage................173

Repeat compact disc tracks.....................221Type 1.......................................................................221

Type 2.....................................................................222

Type 3, 4 and 5....................................................222

Replacement PartsRecommendation........................................10Collision Repairs....................................................10

Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical

Repairs.................................................................10

Warranty on Replacement Parts....................10

Replacing a Lost Key or RemoteControl.............................................................33

Road Safety.....................................................191Safety information.............................................192

Roadside Emergencies...............................135Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................120Route displays...............................................201

Junction zoom.....................................................201

Map display..........................................................201

Navigation display..............................................201

258

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Index

Page 261: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 261/266

Route options menu..................................200Driver......................................................................200

Dynamic...............................................................200

Eco settings.........................................................200

Ferry/motorail....................................................200Motorway.............................................................200

Route.....................................................................200

Seasonal roads....................................................201

Toll..........................................................................200

Toll sticker.............................................................201

Running-InSee: Breaking-In..................................................132

Running Out of Fuel......................................87

SSafety Belt Height Adjustment.................25Safety Belt Minder.........................................26

Switching the Safety Belt Minder Off...........26

Safety Belts......................................................24Principle of Operation.........................................24

Safety Precautions........................................86Seats....................................................................72Security code..................................................213

Entering a security code...................................213

Security..............................................................34

Setting the clock on the audio unit........214...................................................................................215

Changing the time..............................................214

Exact hour adjustment.....................................214

Shuffle/random.............................................221Type 1.......................................................................221

Type 2......................................................................221

Type 3, 4 and 5.....................................................221

Side Airbags.....................................................29Side Curtain Airbags.....................................29Sitting in the Correct Position....................72Sliding Windows.............................................52Snow Chains

See: Using Snow Chains...................................174

Sound button.................................................216Special Notices................................................10Speed Control

See: Cruise Control.............................................116

Stability Control............................................107Principle of Operation.......................................107

Starter SwitchSee: Ignition Switch.............................................82

Starting a Diesel Engine..............................84Cold or Hot Engine..............................................84

Failure to Start......................................................84

Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................83Cold or Hot Engine...............................................83Engine Idle Speed after Starting....................83

Failure to Start......................................................84

Flooded Engine.....................................................83

Starting and Stopping the Engine...........82General Information............................................82

Station preset buttons................................217....................................................................................217

Type 0 and 1...........................................................217

Type 2, 3, 4 and 5.................................................217

Station tuning control.................................216

Manual tuning......................................................216Scan tuning...........................................................216

Seek tuning...........................................................216

Steering Wheel Lock.....................................82Unlocking the Steering Wheel........................83

Vehicles without Keyless Starting.................82

Steering Wheel...............................................39Storage Compartments..............................80Supplementary Restraints System..........27

Principle of Operation.........................................27

Switching Off the Engine............................85

Vehicles With a Turbocharger.........................85Symbols Glossary.............................................7System settings.............................................197

Audio settings......................................................198

Clock settings......................................................198

Menu structure - Information and

entertainment display - All

vehicles.............................................................198

Menu structure - Information and

entertainment display - Vehicles with

navigation system..........................................197

TTailgate.............................................................124

Lowering the Tailgate........................................124

Technical SpecificationsSee: Capacities and Specifications.............182

259

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Index

Page 262: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 262/266

Telephone commands...............................243Create a phonebook.........................................246

Main settings........................................................247

Phone.....................................................................243

Phone functions.................................................244Telephone controls......................................231

Remote control....................................................231

Telephone setup..........................................229Bond another Bluetooth phone...................230

Making a phone an active phone.................229

Phonebook...........................................................229

Phonebook categories.....................................229

Telephone.......................................................229General Information.........................................229

Terrain Response..........................................109

Principle of Operation......................................109Tires

See: Wheels and Tires.......................................174

Tow Ball............................................................1294x2............................................................................129

4x2 (vehicles with increased ride height)

and 4x4.............................................................130

Driving without a trailer....................................130

Maintenance........................................................130

Towbar Dimensions.....................................187Towing a Trailer..............................................125

Trailer Tow Module.............................................125Towing Points................................................130Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels.......131

All Vehicles.............................................................131

Vehicles With Automatic

Transmission....................................................131

Towing...............................................................125Track selection...............................................221

Type 2, 3, 4 and 5................................................221

Type 3, 4 and 5.....................................................221

Traction Control............................................106Principle of Operation......................................106

Traffic information control........................218Activating traffic announcements...............218

Ending traffic announcements......................218

Traffic announcement volume......................218

Traffic Message Channel..........................202Principle of Operation......................................202

Trailer Sway Control....................................126Transmission....................................................93Transmission

See: Transmission................................................93

Trip Computer..................................................61Controls....................................................................61

Type approvals.............................................250FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE.............250

RX-42 - declaration of conformity..............250

UUnder Hood Overview - 2.2L

Duratorq-TDCi (Puma) Diesel.............154Under Hood Overview - 2.5L Duratec-HE

(122kW/165PS) - MI4...............................152Under Hood Overview - 3.2L

Duratorq-TDCi (Puma) Diesel.............156Using Cruise Control.....................................116

Switching Cruise Control Off...........................117Switching Cruise Control On...........................116

Using Four-Wheel Drive...............................97Driving in Special Conditions With

Four-Wheel Drive............................................98

Four-Wheel Drive, High Range (4H).............97

Four-Wheel Drive, Low Range (4L)...............97

Shifting Between 2H and 4H...........................97

Shifting Between 2H and 4L...........................98

Shifting Between 4H and 4L...........................98

Two-Wheel Drive, High Range (2H)..............97

Using Hill Descent Control.......................109HDC Operation....................................................109

Selecting HDC.....................................................109

Using Snow Chains......................................174Vehicles with Stability Control.......................174

Using Stability Control................................1072-wheel drive vehicles......................................107

4-wheel drive vehicles......................................107

Using the telephone....................................231Changing the active phone............................232

Debonding a bonded phone..........................233

Making a call.........................................................231

Muting the microphone...................................232

Receiving an incoming call.............................232

Receiving a second incoming call................232

Using TMC......................................................202Ending traffic announcements.....................202

Hazard spot warning (depending on

country)............................................................202

Traffic announcement.....................................202

Using TMC messages......................................202

Using Traction Control...............................106

260

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Index

Page 263: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 263/266

Using voice control......................................234Name tag..............................................................235

System operation..............................................234

Using Winter Tires.........................................174

VVehicle Care.....................................................172Vehicle Dimensions.....................................182

4-door stretch cab.............................................183

Double cab............................................................185

Single cab..............................................................182

Vehicle Identification Number................190Vehicle Identification Plate......................190Vehicle Interior Overview..............................14

VentilationSee: Climate Control...........................................65

VentsSee: Air Vents.........................................................65

VINSee: Vehicle Identification Number............190

Voice control..................................................234Principle of Operation......................................234

Voice Control...................................................40

WWarning Lamps and Indicators.................53

ABS warning lamp...............................................54

Airbag warning lamp..........................................54Brake system warning lamp............................54

Cruise control.........................................................57

Direction indicators.............................................56

Door open warning lamp..................................56

DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter)........................56

Electronic locking differential (ELD)

indicator..............................................................55

Engine warning lamps........................................55

Four-wheel drive indicator................................55

Four-wheel drive low (4L) indicator.............55

Front fog lamp indicator....................................56Gear shift indicator lamp (Manual

only)......................................................................57

Glow plug indicator - For Diesel

vehicles...............................................................56

Headlamp indicator............................................56

High beam indicator............................................56

Ice/Frost warning indicator..............................56

Ignition warning lamp.........................................54

Low fuel level warning lamp............................54

Oil Change Reminder Indicator (Diesel

only).....................................................................55Oil pressure warning lamp................................55

Rear fog lamp indicator.....................................56

Safety belt indicator............................................57

Stability control (ESP) indicator....................54

Vehicle immobilizer indicator..........................54

Washer fluid level indicator..............................56

Water-in-fuel indicator (Diesel only)...........56

Warning Triangle...........................................135Double cab............................................................136

Single cab..............................................................135

Stretch cab............................................................135

Washer Fluid Check......................................161Washers

See: Cleaning the Exterior................................172

See: Wipers and Washers..................................41

Waveband button........................................216Wheel Nuts

See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................174

Wheels and Tires...........................................174General Information...........................................174

Technical Specifications.................................180

261

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Index

Page 264: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 264/266

Windows and Mirrors...................................49Windshield Washers.....................................42Windshield Wipers..........................................41

Intermittent wipe..................................................41

Winter TiresSee: Using Winter Tires.....................................174

Wipers and Washers......................................41

262

Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013

Index

Page 265: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 265/266

Page 266: Ford Ranger Manual

7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 266/266